Sie sind auf Seite 1von 395

Content

Operating Instructions

Condition of extradition:

Model: 830D
Driving engine: CUMMINS QSB 6.7 C203 CM850
Equipment: K15, KA8,5, ST7,0
Undercarriage: MP30D-2

Machine number: 830.0.9010 en


Operating Instructions

Version: 1.0
-
+49 9421 540 - 0 @ documentation@sennebogen.de http://www.sennebogen.com

de Sollten Sie die Sprache der Anleitung nicht verstehen, dürfen Sie die Maschine
nicht in Betrieb nehmen. Im Bedarfsfall kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihren regionalen
SENNEBOGEN-Händler oder die SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH.

en If you do not understand the language in which the manual is written, you are not
permitted to place the machine in service. If necessary contact your regional
SENNEBOGEN dealer or contact SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH.

fr Vous n'êtes pas autorisé à mettre la machine en service si vous ne maîtrisez pas la
langue dans laquelle est rédigée la notice. Si besoin, contactez le distributeur
SENNEBOGEN de votre région ou SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH..

es Está prohibido poner en marcha la máquina si no se entiende el idioma en el que


están redactadas las instrucciones. En caso necesario, póngase en contacto con
su distribuidor SENNEBOGEN regional o con SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik
GmbH.

pt Caso não compreenda o idioma do manual, não pode operar a máquina. Em caso
de necessidade contacte o seu comerciante SENNEBOGEN regional ou a
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH.

it Non mettere in funzione la macchina se il manuale è redatto in una lingua non


comprensibile. In caso di necessità contattare il rivenditore SENNEBOGEN locale o
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH.

nl Wanneer u de taal van de handleiding niet begrijpt, mag u de machine niet in bedrijf
nemen. Indien nodig kunt u contact opnemen met uw regionale SENNEBOGEN-
dealer of met SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH.

ru Запрещается вводить машину в эксплуатацию, если вы не понимаете языка


руководства. В случае необходимости обратитесь к вашему региональному
дилеру SENNEBOGEN или в компанию SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH..

bg Ако не разбирате езика на ръководството, не трябва да пускате машината в


експлоатация. При необходимост се свържете с вашия регионален търговски
представител на SENNEBOGEN или със SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik
GmbH

da Hvis ikke du forstår sproget, som vejledningen er udfærdiget på, må du ikke tage
maskinen i drift. Ved behov skal du kontakte din lokale SENNEBOGEN-forhandler
eller SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH
+49 9421 540 - 0 @ documentation@sennebogen.de http://www.sennebogen.com

et Kui Te ei peaks juhendi keelest aru saama, siis ei tohi Te masinat käiku võtta.
Vajaduse korral võtke palun regionaalse SENNEBOGENi edasimüüja või
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH-ga ühendust.

fi Jos et ymmärrä ohjeiden sisältöä, et saa käyttää konetta. Ota tarvittaessa yhteyttä
paikalliseen SENNEBOGEN:in edustajaan tai suoraan tehtaaseen SENNEBOGEN
Maschinenfabrik GmbH..

el Εάν δεν καταλαβαίνετε τη γλώσσα των οδηγιών τότε δεν πρέπει να θέσετε σε
λειτουργία το μηχάνημα. Σε περίπτωση ανάγκης, επικοινωνήστε με το τοπικό
κατάστημα πώλησης της SENNEBOGEN ή με τη SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik
GmbH.

hr Ako Vam jezik uputa nije razumljiv, stroj ne smijete puštati u rad. Ako je potrebno,
kontaktirajte Vašeg regionalnog SENNEBOGEN distributera ili tvrtku
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH.

lv Ja jūs nesaprotat instrukcijas valodu, jūs nedrīkstat uzsākt mašīnas ekspluatāciju.


Ja nepieciešams, sazinieties ar savu reģionālo SENNEBOGEN servisa partneri vai
uzņēmumu SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH.

lt Jei nesuprantate kalbos, kuria pateikiama instrukcija, mašinos nenaudokite.


Prireikus susisiekite su vietiniu „SENNEBOGEN“ pardavėju arba su įmone
„SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH“.

pl W przypadku, gdy użytkownik nie rozumie języka instrukcji, uruchomienie maszyny


jest niedozwolone. W razie konieczności proszę kontaktować się w regionalnym
przedstawicielem firmy SENNEBOGEN lub SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik
GmbH.

ro Dacă nu înţelegeţi limba instrucţiunilor, nu trebuie să puneţi maşina în funcţiune.


Dacă este nevoie, contactaţi distribuitorul regional SENNEBOGEN sau
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH.

sv I fall du inte förstår språket i anvisningen skall du inte ta maskinen i drift. Kontakta
gärna din regionala SENNEBOGEN-återförsäljare eller SENNEBOGEN
Maschinenfabrik GmbH vid behov.

sk Stroj nesmiete uviesť do prevádzky, ak nerozumiete jazyku návodu. V prípade


potreby kontaktujte vášho miestneho predajcu SENNEBOGEN alebo
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH.
+49 9421 540 - 0 @ documentation@sennebogen.de http://www.sennebogen.com

sl Če ne razumete jezika navodil, stroja ne smete dati v obratovanje. Po potrebi se


obrnite na svojega regionalnega trgovca z izdelki SENNEBOGEN ali na podjetje
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH.

cs Pokud nerozumíte jazyku návodu, nesmíte stroj uvést do provozu. V případě


potřeby kontaktujte svého regionálního prodejce značky SENNEBOGEN nebo
společnost SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH.

hu Amennyiben nem értené az utasítás nyelvét, úgy a gépet tilos üzembe helyezni.
Szükség esetén vegye fel a kapcsolatot a regionális SENNEBOGEN
viszonteladóval vagy a SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH-val.

is Ef þið skiljið ekki tungumálið á leiðbeiningunum skal ekki taka vélina í notkun. Ef
nauðsynlegt er skal hafa dsamband við söluaðila SENNEBOGEN eða
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH.

no Dersom du ikke forstår språket til anvisningen skal maskinen ikke tas i drift. Ved
behov må du ta kontakt med din regionale SENNEBOGEN-forhandler eller
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH.

tr Kılavuzun dilini anlamadığınız takdirde, makineyi işletime almanıza kesinlikle


müsaade edilmez. Gerektiğinde bölgesel SENNEBOGEN satıcısına veya
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH şirketine başvurun.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Type (Model)
825 + 830

825 + 830 / 04.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions from 830.x.1100 / 825.x.1200
Important instructions on the operating manual

Foreword You have made the decision for a brand quality product from
SENNEBOGEN. We thank you for your decision.
Our utmost concern is that your SENNEBOGEN quality product
performs your work reliably, continually and with no faults.
You know that the reliability and life-span of every machine is greatly
influenced by the regular and professionally handled service and
maintenance work.
We would therefore ask that you read the following service and
maintenance information and apply it accordingly.

For your own Functionality, reliability, availability and advanced technology, e.g. the
safety implementation of modern materials and technology requires specially
adapted maintenance and repair methods. Only use genuine
SENNEBOGEN spare parts. Any respective work on your
SENNEBOGEN machine is therefore only to be carried out by
authorized SENNEBOGEN partners. Improperly performed
maintenance or service work may result in consequential damages and
the connected safety risks.

Parts and accessories Use only genuine replacement parts and accessory products that are
authorized by SENNEBOGEN. These parts have been tested by
SENNEBOGEN for their safety and functional suitability in
SENNEBOGEN machines. SENNEBOGEN will not be held
responsible for any parts or accessory products that have not be
approved.

Warranty The warranty can become void among other things, if:
 Replacement parts are not genuine SENNEBOGEN-approved
replacement parts
 The maintenance is not performed at the specified maintenance
intervals
 No maintenance has been performed
 The service and maintenance work has not be performed by a
SENNEBOGEN partner.
In the event of damage, SENNEBOGEN retains the rights to
demanding written verification for all maintenance work, performed
completely and correctly!
In this respect, SENNEBOGEN recommends completing special
service and maintenance contracts with the authorized
SENNEBOGEN partner of your choice.

W-2 Translation of the original operating instructions 825 + 830 / 04.2010


Important instructions on the operating manual

Notes on the operating Read through the operating instructions thoroughly, in particular
instructions chapter 1 SAFETY, before starting work with the machine.

ATTENTION
 Only work with/on the machine once you have read and completely
understood these operating instructions.
 Refrain from operating and maintaining the machine in an unsafe
manner.
 Do not operate machine if a fault has been detected!
 The machine may be set up, operated and maintained by trained
personnel only.
 The employer is responsible for the qualifications and training of the
personnel.
 These operating instructions are a part of the machine. Keep the
operating instructions in the cab at all times.
Recommended storage place: Stowing compartment behind the
driver’s seat.
In the event of sale, disposal or loan, the operating instructions must
accompany the machine!
 Contact SENNEBOGEN immediately if there is anything in the
operating instructions which you do not understand!
Your comments will help us to make the operating instructions even
more user friendly.
 Maintenance of the machine is described in separate instructions.

For reasons of clarity, the specified safety devices are not shown in
some of the illustrations. Operation with safety devices removed is not
permitted!

825 + 830 / 04.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions W-3


Important instructions on the operating manual

Symbols and illustration These operating instructions contain safety notes that highlight
devices dangerous working practices. These safety notes are indicated with a
warning symbol and a keyword.

This warning symbol means: Attention - this concerns your safety and
the safety of others.
The associated keyword signifies the degree of danger:
DANGER
Is used for serious, direct danger. If this danger is not averted, serious
physical injuries or loss of life of persons will result.

WARNING
Is used for potentially dangerous situations. If this danger is not
averted, serious physical injuries or loss of life of persons may result.

CAUTION
Is used for potentially dangerous situations. If this danger is not
averted, physical injuries or serious material damage may result.

Notes which make the work easier or contribute to better understanding


when operating the machine are displayed in the following way:
Note
Indicates notes which draw your attention to specific features
.

Note
Indicates cross-references to other documents.

Optional / special equipment


Designates instructions and information, which depends on special
applications or special equipment.

Designates instructions or information that draws attention to features


of a machine with mobile undercarriage.

W-4 Translation of the original operating instructions 825 + 830 / 04.2010


Important instructions on the operating manual

Designates instructions or information that draws attention to features


of a machine with crawler undercarriage.

Designates instructions or information that draws attention to features


of a machine with platform (4-point sub-frame)
.

Designates instructions or information that draws attention to features


of a machine with rail undercarriage.

Handling instructions are shown in table form as follows:

1 Press switch (1).


2 Actuate control lever (3).
3 Unfasten pins (3).

 Listings are marked with bullet points.


– Sub-points in listings or handling instructions are marked with
dashes.

825 + 830 / 04.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions W-5


Important instructions on the operating manual

Glossary of terms Operator


The operator (owner of the company/company) is responsible for
operating the machine in a correct manner, or for ensuring that the
product is being used by suitable and instructed personnel.
Operating personnel
The operating personnel are the person/s authorized by the operator to
use the product.
Specialist personnel
Trained technicians are those authorized by the operator to fulfill
certain obligations such as installation, fitting, repair and maintenance
and troubleshooting.
 Specialists
Specialists are those who, on the basis of specialist training,
knowledge and experience with the product and in the full
knowledge of the relevant standards, can appraise the work
allocated to them and can recognize potential dangers and avoid
them.
 Instructed personnel
Instructed personnel are those who have received instruction in the
tasks allocated to them and in the potential dangers of misuse and
misbehavior, who have been taught about the necessary safety
equipment, safety measures, relevant regulations, accident
prevention guidelines and operating conditions and who have
proved their abilities.
 Experts
Experts are those who, on the basis of specialist training and
experience have sufficient knowledge in the area of the product and
are sufficiently aware of the relevant national occupational safety
guidelines, accident prevention guidelines, regulations and
generally recognized technical regulations (e.g. EEC-Guidelines,
VDE-Regulations, VBG) as to be able to judge the operational safety
of the machine.
 Experts
Experts are those who are authorised by the technical authorities
(TÜV) or by a trade association to check the machinery.
Authorization by the trade association takes place in accordance
with the “Principles for the authorization of experts for the testing of
cranes” (ZH 1/518). It is linked with the issue of an identity number.
This is to be stated by the expert in the test report and or test memo.
Authorizations can be limited to parts of tests or specified crane
types.

W-6 Translation of the original operating instructions 825 + 830 / 04.2010


Important instructions on the operating manual

Target group The machine has been developed for demanding work.
Persons working on or with the machine must be trained or instructed
for that purpose.
Detailed information on the prior knowledge and qualifications required
of the operator can be found in chapter 1 SAFETY of these instructions.

Which documentation The following documentation belongs to the machine:


belongs with the
 These instructions
machine?
 Maintenance instructions
 Spare parts catalogue
 Service booklet
 Additional documentation from pre-suppliers.

Note
The complete scope of delivery is defined in the order confirmation.

825 + 830 / 04.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions W-7


Important instructions on the operating manual

How are the instructions The instructions are split into 10 chapters:
organized?
 1: safety
The applicable safety information is found here.
 2: Overview
The main components of the machine are shown in chapter 2.
 3: Customer-specific models and functions
Here, you will find information that is specific to your machine.
 4: Technical data
Here, you can find the fundamental machine information, e.g. lifting
capacities.
 5: Commissioning
This chapter contains notes on daily machine maintenance and
start-up.
 6: Operation
This chapter contains the information on the operational elements
and operation of the unit.
 7: Transportation
Dimensions and weights of the machine are found in chapter 8.
 8: Troubleshooting
This chapter contains notes on recognizing the causes of faults and
how to correct them.
 9: Setup work
Chapter 10 gives information on optional tools.
 10: Appendix
Here you will find an index of key words and additional information,
e.g. about the magnet system.

W-8 Translation of the original operating instructions 825 + 830 / 04.2010


Important instructions on the operating manual

How to SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH


contact us Hebbelstraße 30
D-94315 Straubing

Telepho +49 9421 540-0


ne:
Internet: http://www.sennebogen.de

Fax Customer Service +49 9421 540279


Desk:
Fax spare parts depot +49 9421 40811

Technical documentation:

E-mail: doku@sennebogen.de
Fax: +49 9421 540380

Note
The addresses of the SENNEBOGEN Sales and service partners can
be found on our Homepage on the Internet.

Current when Ongoing development ensures the advanced technology and the high
going to press level of quality in our machines. This may result in deviations between
these instructions and your machine. Errors can also not be ruled out.
Please understand, that no legal claims can be derived from the
specifications, illustrations and descriptions within these instructions.

Copyright © Straubing 2010, SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH


Reproduction, also in part, only with written permission of Sennebogen
Maschinenfabrik GmbH, Straubing, Germany.
Printed in Germany.

825 + 830 / 04.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions W-9


Important instructions on the operating manual

W - 10 Translation of the original operating instructions 825 + 830 / 04.2010


Table of contents

1 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Potential instances of misuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.4 Misuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.5 Other risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.6 Machine Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.6.1 dentification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.6.2 Declaration of Incorporation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.6.3 Warning and notice labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.7 Responsibilities of the operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.8 Supplementary and operational equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.8.1 SENNEBOGEN-Diagnostic-System (SDS) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.8.2 Oils and lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.8.3 Diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.8.4 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.8.5 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.8.6 Fuel (not with electric motors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1.9 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1.9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1.9.2 Cleaning work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
1.9.3 Safe entry and exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1.9.4 Emergency exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
1.9.5 Emergency exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
1.9.6 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
1.9.7 Operation/Driving operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
1.9.8 Setup work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1.9.9 Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
1.9.10 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
1.9.11 Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
1.10 Safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
1.11 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
1.12 Hand signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46

2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Complete machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1 Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2 Crawler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.3 Structure (4-point sub-frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.4 Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

825 + 830 / 10.2010 0-1


Table of contents

2.2 Undercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5


2.2.1 Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.2 Crawler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.3 Structure (4-point sub-frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.2.4 Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.3 Superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.3.1 Side views with Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.3.2 Side views with electric motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.3.3 View from above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3.4 Central electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.3.5 Electrical control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.4 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.1 Compact boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.4.2 Pipe fracture safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.4.3 Attachments and Vario Tool (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

3 Customer-specific models and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1


3.1 Basic machine configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Lifting capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.1 Lifting capacities 830 D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.2 K13 compact boom 9,8 m and 7,5 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3 Lubrication points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.1 Machine - Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.4 Warning and notice labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.5 Supplemental information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.5.1 Driving speed (rails) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.5.2 Machine dimensions (Rail / 4-point sub-frame) . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.5.3 Weight (Rail / 4-point sub-frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

4 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1


4.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Driving engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2.1 Type 825 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.2 Type 830 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3 Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.3.1 Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.3.2 Crawler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.3.3 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.3.4 Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.4 Machine dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

0-2 825 + 830 / 10.2010


Table of contents

4.4.1 Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10


4.4.2 Crawler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.4.3 Structure (4-point sub-frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.4.4 Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.5 Machine weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.6 Wind speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.7 Conversion factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Cleaning work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.3 Initial operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.4 Checks before daily start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.5 Tests before start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.5.1 Checking the windshield washer level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.5.2 Check fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.5.3 Lubricating the lubrication points manually . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.5.4 Check fill level in central lubrication system. . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.5.5 Check the quantity of grease on the slewing ring teeth . . 5-11
5.5.6 Checking the hydraulic oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.5.7 Check and drain the fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.5.8 Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.5.9 Check coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.6 Check water heating coolant level (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.7 Switch on machine - Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.7.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.7.2 Restraint belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.7.3 Start engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.7.4 Bring machine up to operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.7.5 Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.8 Switching the machine off - Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.8.1 Switching off engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.9 Decommissioning - Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.10 Preservation and storage - Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.11 Switch on machine - Electric motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.11.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.11.2 Restraint belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.12 Switching the machine off - Electric motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.12.1 Switching the motor off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.13 Decommissioning - Electric motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

825 + 830 / 10.2010 0-3


Table of contents

5.14 Preservation and storage - Electric motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31


5.15 Starting up operating again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.16 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

6 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Driver's cab/cab with platform, raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.1 Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.3 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.3.1 Overview with steering wheel control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.3.2 Overview with joystick control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.3.3 Overview with crawler steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.3.4 Safety lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.3.5 Control lever, left-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.3.6 Control lever, right-hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.3.7 Additional displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.3.8 Overview of control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.3.9 Control panel, next to the driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.3.10 Control panel Engine/Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.3.11 Panel indicator lights, lower right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.3.12 Control panel, right-hand bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.3.13 Air conditioning control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.3.14 Control panel, right bottom (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.3.15 Control panel, top right on the ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.3.16 SENNEBOGEN Diagnosis System (SDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6.4 Additional displays (special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
6.4.1 SENNEBOGEN Tool Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
6.4.2 Load moment limiter (LML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
6.4.3 Generator and Magnet Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
6.4.4 Camera/Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
6.4.5 Auxiliary heating / Water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
6.4.6 Low-temperature package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
6.4.7 External loudspeaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
6.5 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
6.5.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
6.5.2 Maneuvering cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
6.5.3 Emergency lowering - cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
6.5.4 Driving machine - Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
6.5.5 Stabilizing machine - Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
6.5.6 Driving machine - Crawler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
6.5.7 Changing the crawler track width (hydraulic - optional) . . 6-88

0-4 825 + 830 / 10.2010


Table of contents

6.5.8 Changing crawler track width (mechanical) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91


6.5.9 Superstructure rotation/braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
6.5.10 Lifting /lowering loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
6.5.11 End limit cut-out equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
6.5.12 Bypassing the safety limit position sensor for "Arm in" . 6-102
6.5.13 Working with the grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
6.5.14 Operation with generator and magnet system (special function)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
6.5.15 Working with scrap shears (special function) . . . . . . . . . 6-107
6.5.16 Working with a hydraulic hammer (special function) . . . 6-108
6.6 Vario Tool (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109
6.7 Foreseeable misuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
6.8 Organizational safety measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
6.9 Safety instructions for the hydraulic system/electrical system . . 6-111
6.10 Safety instructions in operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
6.11 Safety instructions – assembly / maintenance / repair . . . . . . . . 6-112
6.12 Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
6.13 Safety test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
6.14 Changing equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
6.14.1 Operation – coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
6.14.2 Operation – uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
6.14.3 Operation - proper set down of the tool adapters . . . . . 6-120
6.15 Rectifying faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
6.16 Refueling machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-123
6.17 Actions to take if the electronics fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126
6.17.1 Reverse airflow -insufficient cooling capacity- . . . . . . . . 6-126
6.17.2 Steering failure (optional with joystick steering) . . . . . . . 6-127
6.18 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128

7 Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 Machine dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2.1 Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2.2 Crawler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.2.3 Structure (4-point sub-frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.4 Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.3 Machine weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.4 Lock upper structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.5 Lifting machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

825 + 830 / 10.2010 0-5


Table of contents

7.6 Tie down machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10


7.7 Disconnect electrical system from battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

8 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Driving engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 Hydraulic system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.3 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.4 tires and undercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.5 Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.6 SDS fault indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

9 Setup work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1


9.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 Dismantling/assembling the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.3 Mounting/dismounting counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.3.1 Dismantling the counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.3.2 Installing the counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.4 Installing large roller bearings, slewing gear, flange connections . 9-7
9.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.4.2 Preparatory measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.4.3 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.4.4 Mounting pylon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.5 Quick-change couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.5.1 Fastening quick couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.5.2 Pull out coupling insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.5.3 Check/change sealing ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.5.4 Lubricating the coupling sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

10 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1 List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.2 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.3 Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.4 Clean the cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.5 Quick-connect couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.6 Installing large roller bearings, slewing gear, flange connections 10-2
10.7 Warranty conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.8 Electrical water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.9 Lubricants table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

0-6 825 + 830 / 10.2010


Safety - General

1 Safety
1.1 General
The machine is built to state of the art standards and according to
recognized technical security regulations. Nevertheless, there may be
dangers during its use to persons, machines and other property, if
 the machine is not utilized as intended
 the machine is not operated by trained personnel or
not maintained
 the safety notes are not observed
 the machine is found to be defective
 the attachment machinery does not comply with the relevant safety
regulations
 the attachment machinery has faults.
National and international regulations apply in addition to the safety
notes in these operating instructions.
In the Federal Republic of Germany e.g.:
 Winches, Lifting and pulling devices (BGV D8)
 Crane (BGV D6)
 Examination of cranes (BGG 905)
 EU Machinery guideline 2006/42/EC
 EMC Guideline 2004/108/EC
 Electrical Equipment in Machines (EN 60204-1)
 Safety Requirements for Fluid Power Systems and their
Components – Hydraulics (EN 982)
 Earth-moving Machinery – Safety (EN 474-1/-5)
 Safety of Machinery (DIN EN 12100 -1 and DIN EN 12100-2)
 "Outdoor" Directive 2000/14/EC
Note
If the national regulations deviate from our recommendations, the more
stringent procedure should be followed.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1-1


Safety - Intended use

1.2 Intended use


The correct use of the machine concerns solely the lifting, transport and
loading/unloading of loads.
Permitted attachment machinery:
 Grabber
 Magnetic equipment.
In addition, in special cases:
 Scrap metal shears
 Demolition hammer
 Concrete crushers

 Trailer:
The machine is suitable for pulling a trailer but is subject to the
permitted axle load and any questions can be directed to the
SENNEBOGEN customer service.
Attachments An overview of all of the attachment machinery that is currently
available including the matching machine types can be found in the
appendix.
WARNING
Not every attachment is suitable for every type of machine. Only the
attachment machinery (model and size) that is approved for the
respective type of machine is to be attached.
If mounting any other attachment machinery that is not listed, the user/
operator is responsible.
Observe the performance details of the machine. Load capacities are
not to be exceeded under any circumstances.
Other or additional applications are considered as misuse and can
endanger persons or machinery.
Workplace The machine operator’s workplace is in the driver's cab of the machine.
Target group The machine has been developed for demanding work.
Persons working on or with the machine must be trained or instructed
for that purpose. Initial operation, maintenance, transportation and
assembly/dismantling only by trained specialists.

1-2 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Potential instances of misuse

1.3 Potential instances of misuse


The following apply as potential instances of misuse:
 Exceeding the permitted load capacities.
 Using non-Sennebogen parts
 Use in inadmissible ambient conditions.
 Misuse by untrained and uninstructed personnel.
 Inadequate equipment for the application (e.g. protecting the cab
against falling objects with guard grill).
 Operating on insufficiently firm base.
 Neglect of necessary inspection and maintenance work.
 Neglecting to lower suspended loads and boom if necessary when
shutting the machine down (e.g. work stoppages - over night).
 etc.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1-3


Safety - Misuse

1.4 Misuse
Unintended use (Misuse) applies in particular to:
 lifting, driving and transporting of persons
 lifting loads at an angle
 pulling loads
 dragging loads
 pulling free jammed loads
 operation of the machine in explosive environment.
 exceeding the permitted working load
 the attachment/operation of non-approved/permitted attachment
machinery

 Trailer:
pulling attached loads

WARNING
Misuse excludes all liability of the manufacturer! The risk is borne solely
by the user/operator.

1.5 Other risks


The safety notes in these operating instructions are guidelines for the
safe use of the machine by qualified machine operators. However,
SENNEBOGEN cannot anticipate every situation, which may result in
danger in practice.
Therefore, the safety notes and warnings on the machine and in the
operating instructions cannot be all inclusive. The owner and machine
operator still remain responsible for safety.
Signs indicating a warning or other information that are attached on the
machine also refer to residual hazards.

1-4 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Machine Labeling

1.6 Machine Labeling


The machine is provided with special warning and notice signs.
 Do not remove the signs.
 Ensure that all signs are undamaged and legible.
 Clean labels with soap and water if necessary, not with fuel or
solvents.
 Replace damaged, scratched or illegible signs with new ones.
Note
Signs are available from SENNEBOGEN (see Spare Parts Catalogue).

1.6.1 dentification plate

1 Machine type
2 Manufacturer’s No. (Facility No.)
3 Engine performance specification (in kW)
4 Year of manufacture
5 Actual Permissible overall weight of machine
6 Actual Permissible weight on the front axle
7 Actual Permissible weight on the rear axle

(*) Note
The data for positions 5, 6 and 7 is not always engraved on the type
plate.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1-5


Safety - Machine Labeling

1-6 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Machine Labeling

1.6.3 Warning and notice labels

Explanations of the stickers used on the machine

Drilling- and welding work is only to be done by authorized SENNEBO-


GEN-Partner

open fires prohibited!

no smoking

Stepping on many parts of the superstructure is forbidden

Zutritt für Unbefugte verboten!

"Caution! Stay off!“

Note referring to the hazard areas during machine operation

Warnung vor Quetschgefahr!

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1-7


Safety - Machine Labeling

Warning concerning the danger of injuries!


If leaks are present, hydraulic oil will escape under high pressure

Starter batteries, filled with corrosive and poisonous acid.


Do not allow to drop and do not open with force

Warning of rotating components!

Rear if the machine swings outward, keep a safety distance of at least


0.5 m

The system operates under high power!

Before performing any maintenance work, switch the engine off and
remove the ignition key

Belt drive, never reach into the area of the drive belts or pulleys!

Warning of hot surface or hot parts!

Warning concerning the danger of injuries!


Rotating fan baffles

1-8 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Machine Labeling

Maintain safety distance to overhead lines while working!

Danger of crushing in the vicinity of the raising cab (between the cab
and the superstructure)

Note pertaining to exiting in case of emergency, in case of danger,


smash the rear windshield with the emergency hammer and then
leave the cab carefully

The machine meets all essential safety requirements. Continuous


sound levels outside the machine as well, e.g. 103dB

Note regarding the storage location of the fire extinguisher

Secure the machine in these tie-down locations for transport

Tie-down points (eyelets) for lifting the machine

Wear the optional safety belt when working with the machine

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1-9


Safety - Machine Labeling

Read and understand the maintenance instructions before starting


with any cleaning-, service-, maintenance- or repair work

Before starting operation with the machine, be sure to read the oper-
ating instructions and the additional technical information/additional
documentation from any pre-suppliers.

Symbol for the battery isolation switch

Operating voltage of the on-board electrical system: 24 Volts

Symbol for the slewing ring lubrication

Wear personal safety equipment

Fuse for ignition 40A

Note indicating the position of the engine diagnostics plug-in connec-


tor

1 - 10 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Responsibilities of the operator

1.7 Responsibilities of the operator

Routine Specialist testing, required for crane or backhoe operation


checks
The machine must be thoroughly checked by a specialist.
 before initial operation and before operating the machine after
significant modifications
 at least once yearly
 intermediate depending to operating and company conditions.
A specialist in this context is a person who
 has extensive knowledge of this machine and the relevant
regulations and guidelines thanks to specialist training and
 through special instructions of SENNEBOGEN
and can assess the safe working condition of the machine.
Specialist testing, only required for crane operation
The following cranes must be tested by a specialist every 4 years:
– Fuel driven mobile crane
– Location changing fuel driven derrick crane
– Lorry attachment cranes
The specialist inspection is to be performed in the 13th year of
operation and annually thereafter.
Faults that are detected in recurring inspections must be eliminated
within a suitable time-frame depending on how serious a threat they
pose to safety.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 11


Safety - Responsibilities of the operator

Personnel selection and The machine must only be operated and maintained by qualified
-qualifications personnel.
 Employ only trained and instructed personnel.
 Define responsibility for operation and maintenance.
 Comply with the permitted statutory minimum age.

CAUTION
 Personnel under training or instruction must remain under constant
supervision while working on the machine.
 Work on electrical equipment of the machine may only be carried out
by an electrical specialist.
 Work on running gear, braking and steering systems may only be
carried out by specifically trained technicians!
 Work on hydraulic systems may only be carried out by personnel
with special knowledge and experience on hydraulics!
Technical condition of The operator has an ongoing responsibility to monitor the overall
the machine technical condition (obvious external faults and damage as well as
changes to operational behavior) of the machine.
Do not operate machine if a fault has been detected!
Observe mandatory time limits for routine checks.
All damages and incidents are subject to the mandatory logging and
storage regulations.

1 - 12 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Responsibilities of the operator

Independent conversion For safety reasons the machine may not be modified or altered in any
and replacement part way.This applies also to the installation and use of safety devices and
production
valves as well as welding on load carrying parts.
Genuine SENNEBOGEN replacement parts and accessories ensure
the safety of personnel. Parts and fittings from other manufacturers are
not tested by SENNEBOGEN and are not therefore approved. The use
of other components can alter the machine's characteristics and
present a safety hazard.
If other components are used, SENNEBOGEN will not be considered
liable for any resulting consequences.
Impermissible operating  The operating safety of the machine is only ensured if it is used
practices correctly according to these instructions.
 The specified performance data must be observed.
 The performance data listed in the instructions must not be
exceeded
 Trailer max 32t:The machine is not suitable for towing a trailer. Due
to the greater axle load, trailer operation is only permitted with
stronger axles (optional)
 It is not permitted to travel on public roads with a trailer attached.
 Protective roof (FOPS) If there is a danger of heavy items falling, the
machine may only be used if the driver's space is covered by a
protective roof (FOPS). The protective roof is optionally available
from SENNEBOGEN.

Specific dangers The machine operator must check whether the operation gives rise to
specific dangers, e.g. on account of toxic gases, ground quality etc.,
and adopt appropriate measures to avoid or limit those dangers.

Overseas use If the machine is used overseas, the following must be observed:
 Observe the safety regulations of the country where you are
operating the machine.
 Ensure that the operators have the necessary qualifications for the
intended work.
 Ensure that the contents of this operating manual have been read
and completely understood. If necessary, ask Sennebogen for a
copy of this operating manual in the corresponding language.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 13


Safety - Responsibilities of the operator

Permissible ground The maximum permissible ground pressure of the subgrade is


pressure authoritative for safe operation of the machine.
The guidelines in the following table must be taken into consideration
when planning an application
WARNING
If there is any confusion as to the load-bearing capabilities of the
ground on location, a ground inspection must be carried out prior to
beginning machine operation.
Check the ground for hidden problems such as e.g. melting ice or
undercutting.

Type of ground Perm.


Ground
pressure
in [kg/
cm2]
A) Stirred ground that has not been packed 0-1
B) Grown in, obviously untouched ground
1) Mire, peat, muck, topsoil 0
2) Non-binding, sufficiently solid, seasoned ground
- Fine to medium sand 1,5
- Coarse sand to gravel 2,0
3) Cohesive soil
- soggy 0
- soft 0.4
- firm 1.0
- semi-solid 2.0
- solid 4.0
4) Rock that has not been weathered, with few fissures 15 - 30
and is well preserved
C) Artificially packed surface
1) Asphalt 5 - 15
2) Concrete – Concrete group I 50 - 250
- Concrete group II 350 - 550

1 - 14 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Responsibilities of the operator

Slopes and The machine must be set up/operated at a sufficiently safe distance
ditches from slopes and ditches. The distance depends on the type of ground
in the location.
DANGER
The distance to the slope edge must be at least 2 m. It also depends
on the type of ground in the location.
Rule of thumb:
 when the ground is overgrown (or not hilly), the safe distance (A)
must be the same as the ditch depth (B), slope angle at < 45°
 for ground fill (or hilly), the safe distance (A) must be twice as far as
the ditch depth (B), slope angle
at < 30°

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 15


Safety - Responsibilities of the operator

Dangers of non- Non-compliance with the safety notes is dangerous and can be
compliance with the hazardous to persons as well as to the environment and the machine
safety instructions and leads to the loss of any claims for compensation.

Fire extinguisher and The machine is provided with spaces for fire extinguisher and first aid
first aid box box. The operator is obliged to equip the machine with these items. If
necessary, obtain fire extinguisher and first aid box from
SENNEBOGEN.

Warranty conditions The warranty conditions of SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH


are summarized in the warranty manual.

1 - 16 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Supplementary and operational equipment

1.8 Supplementary and operational equipment

1.8.1 SENNEBOGEN-Diagnostic-System (SDS)


Note
Sensors monitor the current operating state of the machine
and transmit the information to the SDS. The measured
data are evaluated in the SDS and displayed automatically
or at the push of a button on the unit. The indicator and
warning lamps are activated if irregularities occur on the
machine.
The SDS carries out a self-test after the ignition is switched on. If the
SDS detects a fault condition, it is displayed on the screen and by
means of LEDs.
Correct a minor fault condition (clogged air filter, empty fuel tank or the
like) by yourself without delay.
Contact SENNEBOGEN Customer Service to correct a more serious
irregularity (one that you cannot correct yourself)

SENNEBOGEN
Diagnostics system

Note
Further information on the SDS can be found in Chapter 5.3.15.
CAUTION
The SENNEBOGEN Diagnostics System must never be cleaned with
cleaning agents containing alcohol or solvents. Failure to observe the
above could result in damage to the plastic surface.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 17


Safety - Supplementary and operational equipment

1.8.2 Oils and lubricants


Note
Only use oils and lubricants approved by SENNEBOGEN. These are
listed in LUBRICANTS TABLE. The ambient temperature for operating the
machine must be between
- 20 °C (- 4 °F) and + 40 °C (+ 104 °F). If the temperature at the site is
outside these values, discuss this with SENNEBOGEN customer
services before starting operation.

1.8.3 Diesel fuel


The diesel fuel provided at the SENNEBOGEN plant complies with
EN 590 with a sulfur content of <10 mg/kg.

Note
The use of sulfur-free fuel is mandatory for engines subject to
EU Stage IIIb and US EPA Interim Tier 4 emissions standards,
in accordance with EN 590 and ASTM D975 S15 respectively.
If this requirement applies to the diesel fuel in the diesel engine
installed, this is also made clear by the sticker shown below, which
is attached to the diesel tank filler strainer.

CAUTION
Fuels that contain more than 15 mg/kg of sulfur can cause severe
damage to the engine and exhaust gas aftertreatment system.
This can render the emissions certification for the diesel engine
null and void, and incur legal consequences for the operator.
Observe the instructions in the engine manufacturer's operating
instructions.

1 - 18 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Supplementary and operational equipment

Note
The use of fuels with a sulfur content greater than 15 mg/kg is permitted
under certain circumstances for engines subject to EU Stage II or IIIa
and US EPA Tier 2 or 3 emissions standards. However, this requires
the use of an engine oil with properties that are specifically tailored to
this specification.
The engine oil provided at the SENNEBOGEN plants is not suitable for
use in this context and must be replaced.
Observe the instructions in the engine manufacturer's operating
instructions.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 19


Safety - Supplementary and operational equipment

1.8.4 Engine oil


The engine oil provided at SENNEBOGEN plants is selected to be
used with sulfur-free diesel fuel with a sulfur content of <15 mg/kg.

Note
The use of low-ash ACEA E9-08 or API CJ-4 engine oils is mandatory
for engines subject to EU Stage IIIb and US EPA Interim Tier 4
emissions standards.
Observe the instructions in the engine manufacturer's operating
instructions.

CAUTION
The use of engine oils with specifications other than ACEA E9-08 and
API CJ-4 will cause damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment system
in engines subject to EU Stage IIIb and US EPA Interim Tier 4
emissions standards. This can render the emissions certification for the
diesel engine null and void, and incur legal consequences for the
operator.

Note
The use of engine oils with specifications other than ACEA E9-08
and API CJ-4 is permitted for engines subject to EU Stage II or IIIa
and US EPA Tier 2 or 3 emissions standards.
Observe the instructions in the engine manufacturer's operating
instructions.

WARNING
Mixing oils, lubricants or operational fluids of different types is not
permitted!
Filling or mixing oils, lubricants or operating fluids (e.g. hydraulic oil,
gear oil, motor oil, coolant, etc.) of different types can lead to damage
to machine components caused by chemical reactions for example.
This damage can in turn result in severe damage to property and to
personal injuries.
Use oils, lubricants and operational fluids that are approved by
SENNEBOGEN only.
Only mix oils, lubricants and operational fluids that are of the same type
or identical (same specifications) from one manufacturer!
Oil diagnosis A regular oil diagnosis helps to avoid unnecessary costs. A series of

1 - 20 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Supplementary and operational equipment

tests will determine:


 the condition of the oil
 the amount of worn metal in the sample
 the wear rate of components
Recommended for hydraulic system.

Note
More helpful information is available from SENNEBOGEN customer
services.
Biodegradable oils and The use of such substances is expressly required where the leakage of
lubricants mineral-based oils and lubricants presents a danger to the
environment. The use of environmental-friendly lubricants is
mandatory, particularly in water or nature conservation areas. Only
synthetic, ester-based bio-oils may be used.
WARNING
Switching to bio-oils and bio-lubricants is only permitted subject to
agreement with and written confirmation from SENNEBOGEN
customer services.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 21


Safety - Supplementary and operational equipment

1.8.5 Coolant
General information WARNING
Mixing coolants and adding cooling system sealing agents or anti-
freeze that contains sealing agents is not permitted.
By filling or mixing different types of cooling fluid or cooling agent
additives, gelling, etc. can occur in the coolant leading to the cooler
being plugged (build-up) and because of the engine overheating or if
the cooling system fails for example, this can damage the machine.
WARNING
Mixing of nitrite-based cooling agents with amine-based agents
produces health-hazardous nitrosamines.
Note
Observe the coolant label in the cooler area.
If the ambient temperature at the work-site is under this value (-36 °C
(-34 °F)), observe the operating instructions of the motor manufacturer
or contact SENNEBOGEN customer service before starting operation.
Note
If only a small amount (up to max. 5 l/1.3 gal.) is required to will the
water-coolant circuit and no suitable coolant is available, you can top
up with clean water in the mean time.
We recommend that you test the concentration at the next possible
time before freezing temperatures however. In some cases, you must
refill with the respective coolant so that the required mixture is achieved
again to prevent freezing.
The coolant is not only required to guarantee the protection against
freezing, it also performs the very important task of protecting against
corrosion. This also requires checking for the correct concentration and
adding when necessary.

1 - 22 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Supplementary and operational equipment

Water
Note
 Use clean, neutral, filtered, fairly soft fresh tap water.
SENNEBOGEN recommends distilled water as the best variant.
 Please note that Caterpillar specifies using distilled water!
 Do not use ditch water, industrial drain water, salt water, sea water
or rain water.
 Always fill using a water-coolant mixture. Observe mixing ratios. Mix
before filling!
Ensure that the water has the following characteristics:

pH value 7-8
Chloride content max. 40 ppm
Sulfate content max. 100 ppm
Water hardness 3-12 °dGH
Ca + Mg max. 70 ppm

Note
Observe the recommended mixing ratio (see manufacturer's
specifications). If the coolant concentration is too high, the cooling and
antifreeze behavior will deteriorate.
CAUTION
Observe the specifications of the coolant manufacturer.
WARNING
Never fill with coolant when the motor is overheated. This will cause
damage to the motor. Allow the motor to cool first.
WARNING
Regarding possible danger to health or environmental dangers,
observe the instructions for using the coolant manufacturer as well.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 23


Safety - Supplementary and operational equipment

Change coolant WARNING


Scalding hazard!
Be careful when draining hot coolant!
Allow the motor to cool first. Catch the coolant in a suitable container
when draining and dispose of according to the respective regulations.
– The cooling system is to be emptied completely before filling
again.
– Rinse the cooling system several times with clear water to rid it of
any residue.
– Fill the cooling system and check the level after a short waiting
period.
– Start the motor and check the coolant levels
CAUTION
Adjusting to the correct coolant level must sometimes be checked more
than once.
Check the following states when inspecting the coolant levels regularly,
e.g.
– lubricant incursion,
– obvious opacity caused by corrosion residue or other particulate
matter.
in which case, the coolant must be replaced as indicated above.
Coolant change Information on changing the coolant and the changing intervals is
intervals provided in the operating instructions of the motor manufacturer.

1.8.6 Fuel (not with electric motors)


Fill the tank with the specified grade of fuel. Clean fuel is essential for
trouble-free operation of the diesel engine.
Notes on quality and fuel selection
Observe the notes in the operating instructions of the engine
manufacturer.

1 - 24 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Safety instructions

1.9 Safety instructions

1.9.1 General
Danger area The danger area is the area around the machine where persons may
come into contact with:
 machine movements while in operation
 working equipment and its attachments
 swinging or falling loads
 falling working equipment.
DANGER
There must be no-one within the danger area!
The machine operator must issue warning signals where persons are
endangered. If the persons do not leave the danger area despite the
warning, work must be stopped.
To avoid becoming crushed by solid components, e.g. buildings, walls
to be removed, scaffolding or other machinery, a sufficient safety
distance (at least 500 mm) must be maintained.
If the safety distance cannot be maintained, then the area between the
solid structure and the work area of the machine must be cordoned off.
If the machine operator has restricted driving and working vision, then
he must be guided.

Personal While working on the machine, the operating personnel are obliged to
safety equipment wear the personal safety equipment as laid down by national
regulations (e.g. safety helmet, ear protection, protective gloves, safety
boots).

Eye bolts are installed as safety eyelets on the superstructure. The


safety eyelets are used for securing a safety belt to protect personnel
from falling from the machine. At working heights of 2.00 m or more,
SENNEBOGEN recommends the use of safety equipment to prevent
falling. At working heights above 3.00 m, using a safety harness is
required legally.
Suspension eyelets are marked.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 25


Safety - Safety instructions

Minimizing noise Housings, covers, cab doors and windows are to be kept closed to
decrease noise levels (as long as this conforms with safety
requirements). Operating elements are to be used gently.
Noise emissions Permanent sound pressure level (LpA) of the machine, measured
at the driver's seat with the cab closed, is below 80 dB. Wearing ear
protection is therefore not essential. The measurements are made
according to Directive 2000/14/EC.
Note
If the permanent sound pressure level (LpA) of the machine, measured
at the driver's seat with the cab closed, is between 80 dB and 85 dB:
 A warning is given in the cab (dB level stated)
 Ear protection is within easy reach in the cab

Vibration The machine operator is protected against mechanical vibration with a


shock-cushioning seat that can be adjusted for his/her weight. The seat
can be adjusted for seat height and backrest. The optimal work position
can be set for each individual driver. The alarm values for hand-arm
vibration (2.5 m/s2) and for full-body vibration (0.5 m/s2) are not
exceeded.
Problems Report problems or damage immediately to a responsible person!
Prevent the machine from incorrect or erroneous use.
Repairs may only be performed by trained specialist personnel.

Qualification of The machine must only be operated and maintained by qualified


personnel personnel.
The independent operation or maintenance of earth-moving machinery
must only be carried out by persons who
 are 18 years or over,
 are physically and mentally suitable,
 are trained in the operation and maintenance of earth-moving
equipment and have proven their ability to do so to the employer and
who
 can be expected to carry out the appointed work reliably.
They must be appointed by the employer specifically for the operation
and maintenance of earth-moving equipment.

1 - 26 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Safety instructions

Work underground and If the machines are implemented in enclosed spaces, the spaces are to
in enclosed spaces be sufficiently ventilated and the respective regulations are to be
followed.
Stability  Position the machine on a firm, even surface.
 If necessary, stabilize the ground below.
 Caution at excavation edge, slopes, dips, etc.
 Position stabilizers also on a firm, even surface.
 with additional ballast:
 The machine must be supported when slewing the upper structure!
 Observe wind speeds!
 Stability is at a minimum when the working gear is transverse to the
direction of travel.
 The highest stability is when the working equipment lies
diagonally (see illustration below).

DANGER
Do not carry out any form of work which will affect the stability of the
machine!
 Stability is reduced when the cab is elevated and when working with
loads at a great height.
 Note that stability decreases when the load is swinging laterally.
 Quick movements can lead to decreased stability or uncontrolled
load movements.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 27


Safety - Safety instructions

Working near power  Before starting work! Clearly mark power lines in the vicinity of
lines building site while under supervision.
 Always assume that overhead lines are live.
 Guide the machine so that neither parts of the machine nor
suspended loads extend into the danger area.
 Maintain a safe distance from overhead lines. If national regulations
recommend no other values, adhere to the following minimum
distances:

Nominal working voltage (volts) Safety distance (meters)


up to 1000 V 1.00
over 1000 V to 110 kV 3.00
over 110 kV to 220 kV 4.00
over 220 kV to 380 kV 5.00
not known 5.00

 Employ a guide to monitor the safety distance.


 The insulating elements fitted to the machine, protective cages or
proximity warning devices do not replace the listed minimum
distances.
 In windy conditions, the overhead lines and the working gear can
swing and consequently decrease the distance.
High voltage contact In the case of high voltage contact, the following rules apply:
 Do not leave the driver's cab.
 Warn those outside from approaching or touching the machine.
 If possible, move all working gear or the entire machine out of the
danger area.
 Arrange for power to be switched off.
 Only leave the machine once the touched or damaged
line is switched off.
DANGER
If the machine has to be vacated in the case of an emergency, e.g.
danger of fire, do not touch the machine and the ground
simultaneously. Jump off the machine with feet together.

1 - 28 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Safety instructions

Lightning Driver’s cabs on construction equipment are generally equipped with


protection against lightning strikes. The lightning current flows through
the cab to ground.
DANGER
 Do not touch any metal parts that make direct contact with the
chassis during storms.
 The electromagnetic field connected with lightning current can
influence sensitive electronic components and could lead to faulty
functionality or complete failure in certain circumstances.
 The enormous heat development can cause extensive damage to
tires. Before putting the machine back into operation, check tires for
damage.
Cleaning work
Before putting the machine back into operation, ensure the operating
and safety elements are working properly.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 29


Safety - Safety instructions

1.9.2 Cleaning work

CAUTION
 Clean machine daily.
 For heavy contamination, clean the machine several times per day
if necessary, especially in recycling applications.
 Ensure that the cleaning agents used do not damage the seals and
components of the machine.
 Do not use aggressive cleaning agents.
 Only use lint-free cleaning cloths.
 Only use dry, filtered compressed air up to max. 2 bar (29 psi).
 Lubricate the lubrication points after every cleaning.
 Replace protective caps on the grease nipples.
 After cleaning the engine compartment, check all lines for leaks,
loosening or damage and correct any problems.
 Risk of condensation
After a wet cleaning, check that there is no moisture in the electrical
control cabinet.
 On completion of cleaning work on the machine, carry out a visual
and functional check acc. to the operating instructions for the
machine.
 When cleaning swivelling connections a high-pressure washer
must not be used. This can cause large quantities of water, cleaning
agents, and dirt particles under pressure to penetrate the sealing
gaps in the swivelling connection, that even with substantial re-
greasing can no longer be removed. This significantly reduces the
service life of the swivelling connection

WARNING
Electrical and electronic components such as the alternator, control
cabinet etc. as well as the bearings of the elevating cab (may cause
damage to the bearing surfaces and result in sudden, uncontrolled
motion when positioning the cab), must never be subjected to a direct
stream of water!
Wet cleaning of these components is prohibited!
When wet cleaning the machine, always make sure that no water/
moisture comes into contact with electrical or electronic components.
– The ingress of water can otherwise damage or destroy the
electrical system of the machine. This can result in sudden,
uncontrolled motion when working.

1 - 30 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Safety instructions

1.9.3 Safe entry and exit


 If necessary, clean steps and ladders prior to use.
 Enter or exit machine only when stationary and after the cab has
been lowered completely - never - during any motion.
 Do not carry any items when climbing up or down.
 When entering or exiting, always ensure that you have three points
of contact on the steps, ladders and grips. (e.g. two hands and one
foot or two feet and one hand)
 lift items of equipment onto machine using cable or lifting gear.
 Do not use operating elements as handholds in driver’s cab.
 Use only the appropriate, provided steps and/or ladders.
 When the cab is raised, access to the gallery is not permitted.
 At working heights of 2.00 m or more, SENNEBOGEN recommends
the use of safety equipment to prevent falling. At working heights
above 3.00 m, using a safety harness is required legally.
Suspension eyelets are marked.

Cab without platform

1 Open the sliding door (1) from the ground.


2 Hold onto the holding grips (2) and use your feed to step on the
steps (3) and climb into the cab.
3 Close the sliding door.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 31


Safety - Safety instructions

Cab with platform

1 Open the door (1) from the ground.


2 Hold onto the holding grips (2) and use your feed to step on the
steps (3).
3 Enter the cab from the rear to the front via the operator catwalk
and then close the door.
4 Close the sliding door.

CAUTION
Risk of falling!
When stabilized, if the brakes are not applied, the wheels will turn!
Only in extreme emergencies and with great care is the cab to be
entered or exited via the wheel hub and the tire.

Note
In some cases, it may be necessary to turn the superstructure to 90°
offset to the undercarriage to allow safe entry/exit.

1 - 32 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Safety instructions

Gallery/Operator
catwalk

DANGER
Risk of falling!
Installation of the gallery/platform (1) is mandatory, since it is part of the
safety concept.

CAUTION
Risk of falling!
Gallery - access forbidden when the cab is raised!
A maximum of 200 kg (440 lbs) is permitted per segment of grid iron on
the gallery. Overloading will lead to damaging the construction, the
results of which can lead to personal injury.
Check the gallery for damage every 3 months (especially cracks) and
repair if necessary.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 33


Safety - Safety instructions

superstructure

2 Hand grips
3 Access steps

DANGER
Wear personal protection equipment (e.g. safety helmet, ear protection,
protective gloves, safety boots) where working conditions require. At
working heights of 2.00 m or more, SENNEBOGEN recommends the
use of safety equipment to prevent falling. At working heights above
3.00 m, using a safety harness is required legally.
Suspension eyelets are marked.

1 - 34 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Safety instructions

1.9.4 Emergency exit


Exiting the cab in a case of emergency can be done through the cab
doors or the rear window.
A safety hammer that can be used to knock out the rear window is
located in the cab.
Cab

Note
In an emergency, you can exit via the rear window (1). Use the
emergency hammer to break the rear window.

Protective roof (FOPS):


The emergency exit through the rear window may be blocked by the
optional protective roof (FOPS). In this case, emergency exit is only
possible through the doors.

CAUTION
Risk of falling!
Exit the cab via the rear structure with extreme caution and climb down
from the vehicle.

1.9.5 Emergency exit


CAUTION
Risk of falling!
When stabilized, if the brakes are not applied, the wheels will turn!
Only in extreme emergencies and with great care is the cab to be
entered or exited via the wheel hub and the tire!

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 35


Safety - Safety instructions

1.9.6 Commissioning
WARNING
 Check that all machine safety devices are complete and correctly
secured.
 Ensure that the gallery/personnel platform has been installed
properly. Falling out when the door is open (with optional safety belt
in place) is no longer possible in this case.
 Wear protective work clothing (e.g. safety helmet, eye protection) if
working conditions necessitate. At working heights of 2.00 m or
more, SENNEBOGEN recommends the use of safety equipment to
prevent falling. At working heights above 3.00 m, using a safety
harness is required legally.
Suspension eyelets are marked.
 Take off jewelry or loose clothing.
 Secure loose items e.g. tools or other accessories.
 Agree on hand signals with guide.
 Obtain information on first aid and rescue facilities.
 Enter and exit machine only when stationary. Use the appropriate
steps and ladders:
– if necessary, clean steps and ladders before use
– Do not carry any items when climbing up or down. lift items of
equipment onto machine using cable or lifting gear.
– Do not use operating elements as handholds in driver’s cab.
 Ensure that there is no one in the danger zone.
 Check machine safety features (e.g. brakes, signal and lighting
devices).
 Check operating elements and safety devices are functioning
correctly while driving slowly.
 Do not operate machine if a fault has been detected.
 Ensure that all actuating levers are in the neutral position.
 Start the machine only as described in the information in the
instructions.

1 - 36 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Safety instructions

1.9.7 Operation/Driving operation


WARNING
 Persons working on or with the machine must be trained or
instructed for that purpose. Operation and deployment may only be
carried out by trained personnel.
 The following applies for all work:
Work only if the work area is level and solid enough.
 Proceed with utmost caution if you override the stick end limit or other
safety shut-off.
 Ensure that there is no one in the danger zone.
 Maintain safety distance to overhead lines.
 Only operate the machine from the driver's seat.
 When switching the attachment (e.g. grabber), take the pressure off
of the hydraulic system.
 Do not transport persons on the machine.
 Consider environment conditions, e.g. poor visibility, wind speeds,
etc.
 Use the specific lifting capacity tables for that machine.
 Note performance specification.
 Check that anchorage points have a sufficient safe working load.
 Observe guide signals as necessary.
 If visibility is poor, ensure that a guide is used for giving the required
signs when reversing.
 Before moving onto ramps or inclines, make sure to obtain the
maximum permitted values from SENNEBOGEN.
 Position boom in direction of travel during long journeys.
CAUTION
On crawler undercarriages:
Risk of severe damage to property!
Driving over hindrances that are raised or lowered, such as e.g. ties,
rails, curbs can cause extreme stress to points in the tracking, the
idlers, the chains, etc. This can cause cracking and breaking of the
tracking components (e.g. idlers).
Driving over such hindrances e.g. ties, rails, curbs, etc. is not permitted!
SENNEBOGEN accepts no liability for damages resulting from such
unintended usage!
Transit is only permitted on even, smooth and preferably concrete (con-
crete slabs) paths/streets! Pay attention to ground load capacities.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 37


Safety - Safety instructions

1.9.8 Setup work


DANGER
 The work performed may only be completed by trained
professionals.
 Wear personal protection equipment (e.g. safety helmet, ear
protection, protective gloves, safety boots) where working conditions
require. At working heights of 2.00 m or more, SENNEBOGEN
recommends the use of safety equipment to prevent falling. At
working heights above 3.00 m, using a safety harness is required
legally.
Suspension eyelets are marked.
 The following applies for all set-up work:
Only carry out the work if the work area is level and solid enough.
 Ensure that there is no one in the danger zone.
– While setting up – before completing all tightening – no persons
are allowed in the hazardous area in which loads could fall or
under hanging loads.
– Keep a sufficient safety-margin from areas of unavoidable cutting
or pinching/crushing danger during the set-up procedure.
 Observe the relevant accident prevention directives for working with
load suspension equipment.
 When dismantling components or equipment, always use load
suspension equipment with a sufficient load bearing capacity.
 Suspend components only with the designated lifting brackets.
 Do not step on equipment that is not designed for it (e.g. parts of the
boom or the ballast).
 Carry out all set-up steps in turn. Never carry out more than one set-
up task at a time.

1 - 38 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Safety instructions

1.9.9 Decommissioning
Before leaving the driver's cab:
 Completely lower cab if necessary
 Position the machine on firm base, if necessary set back from the
edge of the excavation
 Lower suspended loads
 Secure attachment machinery
 Pull safety lever back
 Switch off engine
 Chock wheels/running gear
 Lock cab, show warning lights if necessary.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 39


Safety - Safety instructions

1.9.10 Maintenance
DANGER
Risk of fatality!
There is a risk of serious injury or even death to persons using the
machine or in its vicinity if it moves suddenly or is started
unintentionally. Observe the following:
 Place the machine on a firm base (level, solid, flat), if necessary set
back from the edge of the excavation.
 Lower suspended loads and booms to the ground.
 Apply the brake.
 Pull the safety lever to the rear (all hydraulic functions are inactive).
 Switch off the machine and secure against unauthorized switching
on again before beginning any work.
 Place warning sign on operating elements.
 Secure the machine from rolling away and use a chock if necessary.

Additional measures:
 Allow the machine to cool. If this is not possible, be aware that hot
fluids and components can cause burns.
 De-pressurize the hydraulic system to avoid dangers.

WARNING
 Observe all signs and safety stickers on the machine as well as those
in the instructions. They contain important information about
maintenance procedures.
 The work performed may only be completed by trained
professionals.
 Wear personal protection equipment (e.g. safety helmet, ear
protection, protective gloves, safety boots) where working conditions
require. At working heights of 2.00 m or more, SENNEBOGEN
recommends the use of safety equipment to prevent falling. At
working heights above 3.00 m, using a safety harness is required
legally.
Suspension eyelets are marked.
 Only use genuine SENNEBOGEN spare parts.
 Use only oils and lubricants listed in the lubricant table.
 Collect lubricants and other consumables in suitable containers and
dispose of them properly.
 Observe statutory accident prevention and safety regulations.
 Observe any additional documentation (e.g. engine, etc.) during

1 - 40 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Safety instructions

maintenance work as well.


 Keep the vehicle (e.g. handles, steps, platforms, hand rails etc.) free
from dirt, snow and ice.
 Smoking and handling of open flame is strictly forbidden.
 Use appropriate safe climbing aids or work platforms.
 Stay clear of rotating and moving parts.
 Relieve the pressure from the hydraulic system and other operating
materials before starting maintenance work.
 Dispose of hydraulic oil in accordance with regulations.
 Wear protective gloves when working on steel wire rope.
 Do not lift heavy components by hand. Use lifting gear.
 For pneumatic tires:
When pumping up tires, maintain adequate safety distance and use
tire cage.
 Keep the cab clean and orderly.
 Actuate the battery quick-disconnect switch or disconnect battery
poles to interrupt the power supply.
 When working near batteries, these are to be covered with insulating
material; do not lay tools on the batteries.
 When handling batteries, observe the safety and protective
measures specified by the battery's manufacturer. Fire, sparks,
open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling batteries.
 When working on air conditioning systems, be aware that
refrigerants and refrigerant vapors are hazardous to health. Wear
the respective protective equipment.
 Replace all safety devices on completion of work. Exchange
damaged safety devices for new ones.
 Carry out function check to ensure problem-free operation.
 Only the machine owner or representative may approve the
machine for operation following maintenance work.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 41


Safety - Safety instructions

Qualifications of DANGER
personnel  Work on electrical equipment of the machine may only be carried out
by an electrical specialist.
 Work on running gear, braking and steering systems may only be
carried out by specially trained technicians!
 Work on hydraulic systems may only be carried out by personnel
with special knowledge and experience on hydraulics!
 No welding is to be performed on the device without previous
discussion with the manufacturer.

1 - 42 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Safety instructions

1.9.11 Transportation
WARNING
 In Germany:
Loading and transportation work is only to be carried out by
authorized specialist personnel in accordance with VBG 40, §48 and
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (StVo) §22.
 Observe the relevant regulations for securing of loads.
The respective transport operator is always responsible for the
transportation of machine and accessories.
 Use a low loader with sufficient load-carrying capacity and size.
 When loading and transporting, secure the machine and its working
equipment from unintended movement.
 Clean running gear of machine from mud, snow and ice so that
ramps can be accessed without danger of sliding.
 Provide low loader access ramps with wooden planks.
 Check conditions of route before starting journey.
 Only transport machine using designated tie-down and lifting points.
 Ensure that the machine does not present any hazards to other road
users.
 Wear personal protection equipment (e. g. safety helmet, protective
gloves, safety boots).
 Report any damage that occurred during shipping to
SENNEBOGEN customer service immediately.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 43


Safety - Safety devices

1.10 Safety devices


DANGER
 Do not remove safety devices or covers.
 Always check that safety devices are complete and correctly
secured before starting the machine.
Safety devices include e.g. engine flaps, doors, protective screen,
clothing, fire extinguisher and first aid box.
 Replace all safety devices and covers correctly on completion of
assembly or maintenance work.
 Exchange damaged safety devices for new ones.

Example.-Fig.: Fan grille

Illustration
Overload
warning device
The overload warning device gives an acoustic warning signal if the
permitted safe working load is exceeded. Ensure that the overload
warning device is activated when working with lifting gear. The
danger of tipping is not averted by the overload warning device!

DANGER
Tip-over danger of machine!
Decrease the load immediately (e.g. decrease reach, lower load).

Limit switching The following movements are limited by the limit switching equipment:
equipment
– stick retract
– stick extend
– Hoist up
– Hoist down.

1 - 44 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Disposal

1.11 Disposal
Lubricating and
Consumables

CAUTION
Observe environment protection!
Handle and dispose of used items and materials correctly, especially
 when working on the cooling systems
 when working on lubrication systems and devices
 when working with solvents and
 when working on the cooling systems.

Extract from the Disposal of Waste Oils Directive 75/439/EEC:


 “It is prohibited to mix spent oil with other waste”.
 “Spent oils must not be mixed together”.
 “Used oil filters must be collected, kept, transported and disposed of
separately from other waste.”

Notes
 Lubricants and other consumables must be disposed of at suitable
collection points.
 National environmental conditions valid in the country of use also
apply.

Batteries Observe safety and protective measures when handling batteries.

Notes
 Do not dispose of batteries in a domestic waste facility!
Dispose of defective batteries at a recollection point for spent
batteries.
 National environmental conditions valid in the country of use also
apply.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 45


Safety - Hand signals

1.12 Hand signals


Driver and signaler communicate with each other with the aid of the
following hand signals when vision is restricted in the driving and work
area.
The guide gives the necessary signals to ensure safe operation.
Safety instructions Observe the safety notes before starting
work.
CAUTION
 Only responsible persons may be employed as guides. They must
receive the necessary training before starting their task.
 The guide must not be diverted from this task
by other tasks.
 Observe notes of VBG 40, § 35 Guides as well as the details of DIN
33409 Hand signals for guidance.

Hand signal Explanation

Attention

Extend arm upwards with hand


open

Stop

Extend both arms horizontally.

1 - 46 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Hand signals

Stop! Danger!

Alternately extend and fold in both


arms horizontally

Drive off

Move upwards extended arm back


and forth with hand open

Drive slowly forwards

Both arms bent and beckon


forwards with palms of hands
turned inwards.

Reverse slowly

Bend both arms and wave away


with palms of hands turned
outward.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 47


Safety - Hand signals

Turn right

Left thumb outwards.

Turn left

Right thumb outwards.

Turn upper structure to the right

Left thumb outwards to the left,


rotate right index finger.

Turn upper structure to the left

Right thumb outwards to the right,


rotate left index finger..

1 - 48 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Safety - Hand signals

Hoist equipment (load)

Right extended index finger points


upwards, left hand moves up and
down.

Lower equipment (load)

Right extended index finger points


downwards, left hand moves up
and down.

Increase reach

Both thumbs point outwards.

Decrease reach

Both thumbs point inwards.

Greenline / 01.2010 Translation of the original operating instructions 1 - 49


Safety - Hand signals

Open grab

Hold arm horizontal with half open


hand to the side.

Close grab

Hold arm horizontal with closed


hand to the side.

1 - 50 Translation of the original operating instructions Greenline / 01.2010


Overview - Complete machine

2 Overview
2.1 Complete machine

2.1.1 Mobile

1 2* 3 4* 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 Attachments (Example: 6 Driver's cab/cabin with


grabber, scrap shears) gallery/platform, raising
2* Ulm 7 Undercarriage
3 Grabbing jib 8 Superstructure
4* Vario Tool 9 Stabilizer
5 Compact jib 10 Counterweight

*: Optional model / special function

825 + 830 / 01.2010 2-1


Overview - Complete machine

2.1.2 Crawler

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 Attachments (Example: Grab. 5 Undercarriage


2 Grabbing jib 6 Superstructure
3 Compact jib 7 Counterweight
4 Driver's cab/cabin with
gallery/platform, raising

2-2 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Overview - Complete machine

2.1.3 Structure (4-point sub-frame)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 Attachment (Example: Grab. 5 Undercarriage, with


counterweight
2 Grabbing jib
6 Superstructure
3 Compact jib
7 Stabilizer
4 Driver's cab/cabin with
gallery/platform, raising 8 Counterweight

825 + 830 / 01.2010 2-3


Overview - Complete machine

2.1.4 Rails

1 2 3 4 5* 6 7 8

1 Attachment (Example: Grab. 5* Pylon


2 Grabbing jib 6 Undercarriage
3 Compact boom 7 Superstructure
4 Driver's cab/cabin with 8 Counterweight
gallery/platform, raising

*: Optional model / special function

2-4 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Overview - Undercarriage

2.2 Undercarriage

2.2.1 Mobile

4-point stabilizing

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Sliding front window


(optional)

8*

1 Rear stabilizers 6 Front axle (swing axle)


2 Rear axle 7 Front stabilizers
3 Slewing ring 8 Sliding front window
(optional)
4 Access steps
9 Floating axle cylinder
5 Extra storage space

*: Optional model / special function

825 + 830 / 01.2010 2-5


Overview - Undercarriage

Stabilizer

1 2
3
4

1 Access steps 3 Stabilizer brackets


2 Stabilizer box 4 Stabilizer plate

2-6 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Overview - Undercarriage

2.2.2 Crawler

1 2 3 4 5 6
1 Drive wheel 4 Roller
(Reverse travel)
5 Crawler chain
2 Access steps
6 Front idler (forward travel)
3 Telescoping - attachment
points

1 2 3 4 5 6 3

1 Adjustment drive cover 4 Telescoping - Locks


2 Tie-down points 5 Lubrication point
3 Locking bolts 6 Slewing ring

825 + 830 / 01.2010 2-7


Overview - Undercarriage

2.2.3 Structure (4-point sub-frame)


Note
On machines with 4-point sub-frames, the set-up location must be
prepared on-site. The base (e.g. the concrete quality of the base) must
be able to withstand the ground pressure.
Any anchoring or tie-down points that may be required are to be
provided on the base at the site.
The 4-point sub-frame is to be fastened with standard tie-down
equipment (e.g. chains with tightening device, winch). This will prevent
unintended wandering of the machine.

1 2 3 4 5* 3 6 1
1 Stabilizer 4 Middle bridge
2 Locking bolts 5* Pylon
3 Counterweight 6 Stabilizer box

*: Optional model / special function

2-8 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Overview - Undercarriage

2.2.4 Rails

1 2 3 4 5 6* 7 8

1 Geared motor 5 Drive unit


2 Access steps 6* Pylon
3 Counterweight 7 Middle bridge
4 Electrical control cabinet 8 Track wheel carrier

*: Optional model / special function

825 + 830 / 01.2010 2-9


Overview - Superstructure

2.3 Superstructure

2.3.1 Side views with Diesel engine


Service doors
ne compartment

1a
1* 2 3 4
Engine compartment rear: 2 Water separator – Fuel
1a Auxiliary control filter (series) 3 Pump unit
1* HydroClean 4 Hydraulic oil level display

5 6 7 8
Engine compartment front:
5 Driving engine 7 Combination cooler
6 Fan 8 Air conditioner

*: Optional model / special function

2 - 10 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Overview - Superstructure

Service doors
Driver's side

1 2 3
Driver's side front:
1 Windshield washer reservoir 3 Measurement ports -
hydraulic system
2 Emergency lowering - cab

4* 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Driver's side rear:


4* Fueling hose/pump 8 Fuel tank
5 Fuel filler neck 9 Electrical control cabinet
6 Central lubrication system 10 Batteries
7 Air filter 11 Battery isolator switch

*: Optional model / special function

825 + 830 / 01.2010 2 - 11


Overview - Superstructure

2.3.2 Side views with electric motor

1* 2 3 4 5 6 7

Engine compartment (right 4 Distributor gearbox


side):
1* HydroClean
5 Driving engine
2 Pump unit
6 Fan
3 Hydraulic oil level display
7 Hydraulic oil cooler

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Storage compartments system
(driver's side):
4 Hydraulic oil tank
1 Windshield washer reservoir
2 Emergency lowering - cab
5 Water heating system
3 Measurement ports - hydraulic
6 Central lubrication system

*: Optional model / special function

2 - 12 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Overview - Superstructure

2.3.3 View from above

1
4

2
5

7
9

10*

Detailed view turned by 180°!

1 Exhaust silencer/ 6 Air filter - moisture separator


Exhaust pipe end
7 Hydraulic oil filter
2 Service panel - Hydroclean
8 Cut-off flap
superfine filtration system
Hydraulic oil tank
3 Service panel - engine
9 Service panel - Radiator
4 Service panel
10*Generator
Hydraulic oil tank
5 Service panel - battery

*: Optional model / special function

825 + 830 / 01.2010 2 - 13


Overview - Superstructure

2.3.4 Central electrical system


Service doors
Driver's side
rear
1

1 Automatic circuit breaker 40 Amp (Terminal 15)


2 Automatic circuit breaker 80 Amp (Terminal 30)
3 Battery isolator switch (not with electric motors)

2 - 14 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Overview - Superstructure

2.3.5 Electrical control cabinet

2
1

1 Main switch
2 EMERGENCY STOP switch

825 + 830 / 01.2010 2 - 15


Overview - Equipment

2.4 Equipment

2.4.1 Compact boom


with
Grabbing jib

with ULM
(Optional)

4*

1 Compact boom 3 Grabbing jib with


2 Grabbing jib 4* ULM

*: Optional model / special function

2 - 16 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Overview - Equipment

2.4.2 Pipe fracture safety devices

1 2*

1 Line rupture detector – lifting cylinder


2* Line rupture detector – adjust cylinder

*: Optional model / special function

825 + 830 / 01.2010 2 - 17


Overview - Equipment

2.4.3 Attachments and Vario Tool (optional)

1 2 3

1 Grabber
2 Scrap metal shears
3 Jib base with Vario Tool

2 - 18 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Customer-specific models and functions - Basic machine configuration

3 Customer-specific models and functions


This section contains information that applies specifically to your
machine and/or clearly deviates from the illustrations described in
these operating instructions.
Section3.2 provides the load capacities of the machine.
Note
Detailed descriptions are in the following chapters.

3.1 Basic machine configuration

Model: 830
Undercarriage: MP30D-2
Driving engine:Cummins QSB 6.7
Equipment: K15

825 + 830 / 01.2010 3-1


Customer-specific models and functions - Lifting capacities

3.2 Lifting capacities

Notes
The lifting capacities
 are specified in tons (t) and equate to 75% of the static tilt load or
87% of the hydraulic lifting force according to ISO 10567.
 are applicable for a machine on firm, level ground and apply over a
range of 360 degrees.
 apply when the machine's supports are deployed.
Deduct the weight of the load suspension equipment (hooks,
suspension gear) from the lifting capacities. The values in parentheses
apply in a direction along the lengthwise axis of the undercarriage.

Adverse Limit or reduce load weights, to compensate for adverse


conditions conditions. Adverse conditions are e.g.
 soft or uneven ground
 slopes
 wind
 lateral loads
 swinging loads
 jerking or sudden stopping of load
 inexperience of operating personnel
 driving with load.

3-2 825 + 830 / 01.2010


825 + 830 / 01.2010
01.2011
)"*$+,-(
  
c$&$ ! _$ $   _$  _*-  _$-,9  $
:&$ <:&$$ && *-  _$=Y,  $&_&dd_$$ $&@  
_ $e&     ) ! *

c) !/0_$$ _$$ *


B%'%'  _$$-,&Y%,-'*

C =d W , ! f_$ Y  E  8 C !_$

          

  
   
   
    
     
     
        
          
              
                
3.2.1 Lifting capacities 830 D

                
           
3.2.2 K15 compact boom 8,5 m and 7,0 m

       
   
             
Customer-specific models and functions - Lifting capacities

33 -- 33
Customer-specific models and functions - Lubrication points

3.3 Lubrication points

3.3.1 Machine - Mobile

Manual lubrication

= grease manually

WARNING

WARNING
The grease nipple on the emergency actuating mechanism is
not to be used for lubrication purposes. It is used exclusively for
activating the emergency actuation. The gearbox can be destroyed.

Note
Clean lubricating nipple before lubricating. Remove excess grease.

The lubrication nipples are provided with a red protective cap.

3-4 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Customer-specific models and functions - Lubrication points

a
Lubrication nipples Centralized lubrication, front:
overview Steering knuckle (2 per side)
Support cylinder, inner (2)
Floating axle (1)
a

Comment:
3 grease nipples
per drive shaft/
universal joint

b
Centralized lubrication, rear:
Support cylinder, inner (2)
= grease manually

825 + 830 / 01.2010 3-5


Customer-specific models and functions - Warning and notice labels

3.4 Warning and notice labels


Note
More information can be found in Section1.6.4.

3-6 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Customer-specific models and functions - Warning and notice labels

1 2 3 4 6

25 30 31 34 41

www.sennebogen.de 103050

825 + 830 / 01.2010 3-7


Customer-specific models and functions - Warning and notice labels

3-8 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Customer-specific models and functions - Warning and notice labels

825 + 830 / 01.2010 3-9


Customer-specific models and functions - Supplemental information

3.5 Supplemental information

3.5.1 Driving speed (rails)

3.5.2 Machine dimensions (Rail / 4-point sub-frame)

3.5.3 Weight (Rail / 4-point sub-frame)

3 - 10 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Technical data - General information

4 Technical data
Note
The following values are guidelines. The level specified on the
corresponding components is authoritative (upper mark on dipstick)

4.1 General information


Electrical system 24 V
Note
Ensure that the available output power of the alternator is not exceeded
when installing additional current consumers (e.g. lights).

Ambient temperature Operation / approx. - 20 °C (- 4 °F)... approx. + 40 °C (+


range Operation under load 104 °F)

Note
When running a machine in environmental temperatures outside the
specified temperature range, special temperature packages are
available (optional!).
Please contact SENNEBOGEN customer service if you have any other
questions.

Hydraulics Operating pressure, max. 350 bar

Slewing drive Slewing speed 0 - 8 rpm, continuously variable

Limitations during wind Wind speed


25 m/s 90 km/h 10 Beaufort

Note
Machine operation is generally possible - without any attachments - at
wind speeds of up to 25 m/second.
The decision concerning when operation is to be shut down is to be
made by the machine operator and depends on the attachment being
used.
Different attachments react differently to wind and may affect the
stability of the machine. These are to be determined by the operator
and the machine is to be shut down accordingly.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 4-1


Technical data - Driving engine

DANGER
Once the specified wind speed is reached, stop operating the machine
immediately (lower load, lower jib). Table on wind speeds, see
Section4.6

4.2 Driving engine


Permitted engine inclination:

left right front rear


30° 30° 30° 30°

Note
If the incline is excessive, the engine oil level can no longer be
guaranteed. If you require a greater angle, please contact
SENNEBOGEN customer service in advance.
Observe the notes in the operating instructions of the engine
manufacturer.

4-2 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Technical data - Driving engine

4.2.1 Type 825


QSB6.7-C173
Power (according to 129 kW (172 PS)
ISO14396) at nominal speed 2,200 rpm
Capacity 6700 cm3
Cylinders 6
Oil capacity with filter approx. 18.5 l / approx. 4.88 gal.
(US)
Coolant quantity approx. 45 l / approx. 11.9 gal. (US)
(complete system)
Engine approx. 10 l / approx. 2.6 gal. (US)
Engine, general see manufacturer's instructions

FCMP 280 M4/400V


Power (according to 90 kW (121 PS)
ISO14396) at nominal speed 1,500 rpm
Engine, general see manufacturer's instructions

825 + 830 / 01.2010 4-3


Technical data - Driving engine

4.2.2 Type 830

QSB6.7-C203
Power (according to 151 kW (202 PS)
ISO14396) at nominal speed 2,000 rpm
Capacity 6700 cm3
Cylinders 6
Oil capacity with filter approx. 18.5 l / approx. 4.88 gal.
(US)
Coolant quantity approx. 45 l / approx. 11,9 gal. (US)
(complete system)
Engine approx. 10 l / approx. 2.6 gal. (US)
Engine, general see manufacturer's instructions

FCMP 280 MC-4/400V


Power (according to 132 kW (177 PS)
ISO14396) at nominal speed 1,485 rpm
Engine, general see manufacturer's instructions

Note Regarding Diesel Engine Exhaust Emissions


Quality is of the utmost importance at SENNEBOGEN. As a result, the
diesel engine installation and the engine cooling system in the device
have been developed, tested and manufactured in accordance with the
demanding specifications of the device. This means that the device not
only has an optimal service life, but is also certified as being compliant
with statutory exhaust emission limits.
WARNING
Any modifications made to the
 Engine
 Engine cooling system incl. ventilation ducts
 Air filter system
 Exhaust gas treatment system
 Exhaust system
in the supplied device will invalidate the diesel engine exhaust
emissions certification, which in turn will result in the termination of the
operating license for the device and also the expiration of any claims
made against SENNEBOGEN.

4-4 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Technical data - Machine

4.3 Machine

4.3.1 Mobile
Fuel tank max. 490 l / max. 127 gal. (US)
- Middle view glass: approx. 470 l / approx. 124 gal. (US)
Hydraulic tank max. 310 l / max. 82 gal. (US)
- Middle view glass: approx. 245 l / approx. 64.6 gal.
(US)
Hydraulic system, overall(*)

 Typ 825:  approx. 380 l / appr. 100 gal. (US)


 Typ 830:  approx. 440 l / appr. 116 gal. (US)

Axle distributor gear approx. 3.0 l / approx. 0.8 gal. (US)


Differential
 front approx. 11.0 l / approx. 2.9 gal. (US)
 rear approx. 15.0 l / approx. 4 gal. (US)
Hub drive train
 front each approx. 2.5 l / approx. 0.7 gal.
 rear
(US)
each approx. 2.5 l / approx. 0.7 gal.
(US)
Slewing ring lubrication - approx. 3 kg / approx. 6.615 lb
reservoir
Central lubrication system - approx. 2.5 kg / approx. 5.5 lb
reservoir (optional)

*): On special pylon-equipped machines, note that an additional


approximately 30 l (appr. 7,9 gal. (US)) of hydraulic oil is required per
0.5 m pylon length.

Tire air pressure Model Tire size ppbarp Air pressure


(pneumatic tires) ppsi
825 10.00-20 pp9 ppp130.53
830 12.00-20 pp9 ppp130.53

825 + 830 / 01.2010 4-5


Technical data - Machine

DANGER
When pumping up tires, maintain adequate safety distance and use
tire cage.

Wheel nuts The tightening torque is 650 Nm. Use a torque wrench.

Driving speed Off-road gear (1st gear) 0-7 km/h


Street gear (2nd gear) 0-20 km/h

4-6 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Technical data - Machine

4.3.2 Crawler
Subassembly Quantity
Fuel tank max. 490 l / max. 127 gal. (US)
- Middle view glass: approx. 470 l / approx. 124 gal. (US)
Hydraulic tank max. 310 l / max. 82 gal. (US)
- Middle view glass: approx. 245 l / approx. 64.6 gal.
(US)
Hydraulic system, overall(*)

 Typ 825:  approx. 380 l / appr. 100 gal. (US)


 Typ 830:  approx. 440 l / appr. 116 gal. (US)

Gearbox each approx. 9.0 l / approx. 2.8 gal.


(US)
Slewing ring lubrication - approx. 3 kg / approx. 6.615 lb
reservoir
Central lubrication system - approx. 2.5 kg / approx. 5.5 lb
reservoir (optional)

(*):On special pylon-equipped machines, note that an additional


approximately 30 l (appr. 7,9 gal. (US)) of hydraulic oil is required per
0.5 m pylon length.

Driving speed
1st gear 0-1.5 km/h
2nd gear 0-3.2 km/h

825 + 830 / 01.2010 4-7


Technical data - Machine

4.3.3 Structure
Subassembly Quantity
Fuel tank max. 490 l / max. 127 gal. (US)
- Middle view glass: approx. 470 l / approx. 124 gal. (US)
Hydraulic tank max. 310 l / max. 82 gal. (US)
- Middle view glass: approx. 245 l / approx. 64.6 gal.
(US)
Hydraulic system, overall(*)

 Typ 825:  approx. 380 l / appr. 100 gal. (US)


 Typ 830:  approx. 440 l / appr. 116 gal. (US)

Slewing ring lubrication - approx. 3 kg / appr. 6.615 lb


reservoir
Central lubrication system - approx. 2.5 kg / approx. 5.5 lb
reservoir (optional)

(*):On special pylon-equipped machines, note that an additional


approximately 30 l (appr. 7,9 gal. (US)) of hydraulic oil is required per
0.5 m pylon length.

Driving speed Stationary

4-8 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Technical data - Machine

4.3.4 Rails
Subassembly Quantity
Fuel tank max. 490 l / max. 127 gal. (US)
- Middle view glass: approx. 470 l / approx. 124 gal. (US)
Hydraulic tank max. 310 l / max. 82 gal. (US)
- Middle view glass: approx. 245 l / approx. 64.6 gal.
(US)
Hydraulic system, overall(*)

 Typ 825:  approx. 380 l / appr. 100 gal. (US)


 Typ 830:  approx. 440 l / appr. 116 gal. (US)

Slewing ring lubrication - approx. 3 kg / approx. 6.615 lbs


reservoir
Central lubrication system - approx. 2.5 kg / approx. 5.5 lbs
reservoir (optional)

(*):On special pylon-equipped machines, note that an additional


approximately 30 l (appr. 7,9 gal. (US)) of hydraulic oil is required per
0.5 m pylon length.

Driving speed Speed is customer-specific.

Note
More information can be found in Chapter 3.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 4-9


Technical data - Machine dimensions

4.4 Machine dimensions

4.4.1 Mobile
Note
More information on the dimensions can be found in Section7.2.4.

4.4.2 Crawler
Note
More information on the dimensions can be found in Section7.2.5.

4.4.3 Structure (4-point sub-frame)


Note
More information on the dimensions can be found in Section3.6.2.

4.4.4 Rails
Note
More information on the dimensions can be found in Section3.6.2.

4.5 Machine weight


Note
More information can be found in Section7.3 MACHINE WEIGHT.

4 - 10 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Technical data - Wind speed

4.6 Wind speed


Wind
Wind strength speed Effect

Beau- Designation m/s km/h Inland


fort
scale

0 Calm 0-0,2 1 Calm, smoke rises straight up

1 Light draft 0.3-1.5 1-5 Direction of wind is displayed by


direction of
smoke, but not by a weather
vane

2 Light breeze 1.6-3.3 6-11 Wind is felt on face, leaves


rustle,
weather vane moves

3 Weak breeze 3.4-5.4 12-19 Leaves and thin twigs move,


wind stretches a flag

4 Moderate 5.5-7.9 20-28 Lifts dust and loose paper,


breeze moves twigs and thin branches

5 Fresh breeze 8.0-10.7 29-38 Small deciduous trees start to


sway, breaker foam forms on
lake surface

6 Strong wind 10.8-13.8 39-49 Strong branches are moving,


whistling in power lines,
umbrellas difficult to use

7 Stiff wind 13.9-17.1 50-61 Whole trees are moving

8 Stormy wind 17.2-20.7 62-74 Branches are broken off trees,


walking outdoors is made very
difficult

9 Storm 20.8-24.4 75-88 Slight damage to houses


(chimney hoods and tiles are
blown off)

10 Heavy storm 24.5-28.4 89-102 Uproots trees, considerable


damage to houses

11 Hurricane 28.5-32.6 103-117 Extensive storm damages


type storm (rarely in inland)

12 Hurricane 32.7-36.9 118-133 Severe devastation

825 + 830 / 01.2010 4 - 11


Technical data - Conversion factors

4.7 Conversion factors


Pressure
1 bar 100 Kpa 14.5 psi
10 psi 68.95 Kpa 0.6895 bar

Flow rate
1 l/min 0.0353 cfm 0.2642 gal/min (US)
1 gal/min (Brit.) 0.1605 cfm
1 gal/min (US) 3.78541 l/min

Length
1 mm 0.03934 in
1m 39.34 in 3.281 ft
1 in 25.4 mm
1 ft 0.3048 m 304.8 mm
1 km 39340 in 3280.8 ft
1 km 1093.6 yd 0.62137 mile
1 mile 1.609 km 1,609 m

Weight
1 kg 2.205 lb 35.27 Oz
1 lb (US) 0.454 kg 16 Oz

Power
kW = HP x 0.746
HP = kW x 1.341

Temperature
°C = (°F - 32) x 5/9
°F = (°C x 9/5) + 32

4 - 12 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Technical data - Conversion factors

Volume
1 m3 1,000 l 35.31 ft3 1.308 yd3
1 ft3 28.32 l 0.02832 m3 1.728 inch3
-
1l 0.2642 gal (US) 0.2201 gal (Brit.)
1 gal. (US) 3.785 L 231 inch3 -
1 gal. (Brit.) 4.544 L 277 inch3 -
1 yd3 764.55 l 0.765 m3 27 ft3

Speed
1 m/s 3.281 ft/s 2.237 mile/h
1 ft/s 0.305 m/s 1.097 km/h

825 + 830 / 01.2010 4 - 13


Technical data - Conversion factors

4 - 14 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Commissioning - Safety instructions

5 Commissioning
5.1 Safety instructions
WARNING
 Read Chapter 1 SAFETY.
Before start-up, carry out checks according to
Section5.4 .
 Check that all machine safety devices are complete and correctly
secured.
 Ensure that the gallery/personnel platform has been installed
properly. Falling out when the door is open (with optional safety belt
in place) is no longer possible in this case.
 Wear protective work clothing (e.g. safety helmet, eye protection) if
working conditions necessitate. At working heights of 2.00 m or
more, SENNEBOGEN recommends the use of safety equipment to
prevent falling. At working heights above 3.00 m, using a safety
harness is required legally.
Suspension eyelets are marked.
 Take off jewelry or loose clothing.
 Secure loose items e.g. tools or other accessories.
 Agree on hand signals with guide.
 Obtain information on first aid and rescue facilities.
 Enter and exit machine only when stationary. Use the appropriate
steps and ladders:
– if necessary, clean steps and ladders before use
– Do not carry any items when climbing up or down. lift items of
equipment onto machine using cable or lifting gear.
– Do not use operating elements as handholds in driver’s cab.
 Ensure that there is no one in the danger zone.
 Check machine safety features (e.g. brakes, signal and lighting
devices).
 Check operating elements and safety devices are functioning
correctly while driving slowly.
 Do not operate machine if a fault has been detected.
 Ensure that all actuating levers are in the neutral position.
 Start the machine only as described in the information in the
instructions.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 5-1


Commissioning - Cleaning work

5.2 Cleaning work


CAUTION
 Clean machine daily.
 For heavy contamination, clean the machine several times per day
if necessary, especially in recycling applications.
 Ensure that the cleaning agents used do not damage the seals and
components of the machine.
 Do not use aggressive cleaning agents.
 Only use lint-free cleaning cloths.
 Only use dry, filtered compressed air up to max. 2 bar (29 psi).
 Lubricate the lubrication points after every cleaning.
 Replace protective caps on the grease nipples.
 After cleaning the engine compartment, check all lines for leaks,
loosening or damage and correct any problems.
 Risk of condensation
After a wet cleaning, check that there is no moisture in the electrical
control cabinet.
 On completion of cleaning work on the machine, carry out a visual
and functional check acc. to the operating instructions for the
machine.

WARNING
Electrical and electronic components such as the alternator, control
cabinet etc. as well as the bearings of the elevating cab (may cause
damage to the bearing surfaces and result in sudden, uncontrolled
motion when positioning the cab), must never be subjected to a direct
stream of water!
Wet cleaning of these components is prohibited!
When wet cleaning the machine, always make sure that no water/
moisture comes into contact with electrical or electronic components.
The ingress of water can otherwise damage or destroy the electrical
system of the machine. This can result in sudden, uncontrolled motion
when working.

5-2 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Commissioning - Initial operation

5.3 Initial operation


The initial commissioning of the machine is carried out by
SENNEBOGEN or by a trained and authorized specialist.
If the machine is shutdown for a prolonged period (> 6 months), contact
SENNEBOGEN customer services immediately before
recommissioning.

WARNING
Read CHAPTER 1 SICHERHEIT.
Before start-up, carry out checks according to
Section5.4.

5.4 Checks before daily start-up


Read the safety notes before starting
work.
DANGER
 Familiarize yourself with the machine and equipment. Read these
operating instructions before starting operation, in particular
Chapter 1 SAFETY.
 Only carry out work for which you have been trained and which is
within your scope of employment.

Note
The following pages contain the checklists that should be gone through
before starting work with the machine every day. It is divided into:
– A general part (e.g. A1),
– a function part (e.g. F1) and
– a visual or sight check (e.g. S1).

DANGER
Report all irregularities to the person in charge before start-up. Only
operate machine after remedying all
faults.

Note
In the following checklist, a dash bullet point (-) in the chapter column
indicates that there is not reference for the respective action and there
are no instructions contained in the operating instructions.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 5-3


Commissioning - Checks before daily start-up

No. General information Steps to take Chapte 


r
A1 Are the danger areas (overhead lines, Mark and secure as necessary - 
ditches, etc.) marked and secured in the
operating area?

A2 Do you know the operating and If necessary, obtain information - 


environmental conditions (soil strength etc.)?

A3 Is an experienced person available for If necessary, arrange for a signaler - 


signaling, if required?

A4 Is the danger zone free of persons? If so, advise them to leave the - 
danger area

A5 Is the load weight known? Obtain information as required - 


A6 Are the machine and load securing devices Refer to the operating instructions - 
appropriate for the loads to be suspended? and rating plate as necessary

No. Functional checks Steps to take Chapt 


er
F1 Is the limit sensor on the arm set correctly? If necessary, adjust - 
F2 Is the hoisting limit sensor set correctly? If necessary, adjust - 
F3 Is the overload warning device activated? If necessary, activate 6.3.15 
F4 Is the machine positioned horizontally? If necessary, position correctly - 
F5 Is the stability of the machine ensured? If necessary, support properly - 
F6 Are all safety features (brakes, monitoring/ If necessary, locate and correct - 
warning indicators, signal and lighting faults
devices) working correctly?

F7 Are any warning or fault messages displayed If necessary, locate and correct 6.3.16 
on the SDS? faults, read fault log

F8 Are electrical devices such as the windshield If necessary, locate and correct - 
wipers, heating, air conditioning working faults
correctly?

F9 Is the emergency lowering feature of the cab If necessary, locate and correct 6.5.3 
functioning? faults

F10 Does the steering turn freely? If necessary, adjust - 

5-4 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Commissioning - Checks before daily start-up

No. Functional checks Steps to take Chapt 


er
F11 Is the central lubrication unit functioning? If necessary, refill with grease or 5.5.4 
locate and correct faults (grease
must appear at all connected
lubrication points)

F12 Does the Vario Tool function properly? Clean if necessary 6.6 

No. Visual checks Steps to take Chapt 


er
S1 Are all protective covers, insulating materials If necessary, replace - 
and warning signs in place on the machine
and intact?

S2 Are all steps/ladders, handles/handholds and If necessary, repair or replace - 


anti-slip surfaces in place and intact (e.g.
cracks)?

S3 Is the machine clean enough to ensure no If necessary, clean using a high- - 


danger areas exist due to dirt (danger of pressure cleaner BE CAREFUL
slipping, falling, poor visibility)? around sensitive or electrical
components! !

S4 Are the windows clean and free of ice and If necessary, clean - 
snow?

S5 Is the undercarriage/running gear (tires, If necessary, repair or replace - 


axles, drive shafts/universal joints) intact?

S6 Are the wheel nuts tight and the intermediate If necessary, retighten to the - 
ring firmly seated? specified torque

S7 Is the tire pressure correct? For pneumatic If necessary, repair leaks and pump - 
tires: up tires (using a tire cage)

S8 Is the hydraulic system (lines, hoses etc.) free If necessary, tighten connections or - 
of leaks and intact? replace seals

S9 Are the hydraulic cylinders (e.g. supports, If necessary, tighten connections or - 


arm, floating axle cylinders, steering replace seals
cylinders) free of leaks and intact? Inspect
piston rods for damage (cracks etc).

S10 Is the shutoff on the hydraulic tank open? If necessary, open 2.3.3 
S11 Are the oil and fluid reservoirs sufficiently full If necessary, repair leaks and top up - 
(hydraulic system, fuel tank, engine oil, fluids. Follow manufacturer's
cooling system, windshield washer etc.)? instructions!

825 + 830 / 01.2010 5-5


Commissioning - Checks before daily start-up

No. Visual checks Steps to take Chapt 


er
S12 Are TopAir and air filter cartridges damaged If necessary, clean or replace - 
or contaminated?

S13 Is the fan wheel intact? If necessary, replace - 


S14 Are the cooling fins on the combination cooler If necessary, clean by reversing the - 
soiled or damaged? fan or replace.

S15 Is the cooling system (cooler, hoses, tubing If necessary, repair leaks and top up - 
etc.) free of leaks? coolant. Follow manufacturer's
instructions! Replace defective
components.

S16 Are all hose clamps tight and the hose If necessary, retighten or replace - 
connections free of leaks?

No. Visual checks Steps to take Chapt 


er
S17 Has the water separator on the fuel system If necessary, drain - 
been drained?

S18 Are the V-belts undamaged and tensioned? If necessary, tension again or - 
replace

S19 Are the electrical lines damaged? If necessary, repair or replace - 


S20 Are the cable connections (poles) of the If necessary, clean and grease; - 
battery corroded? cover terminals with protective caps.

S21 Are the batteries held in place securely? If necessary, secure again - 
S22 Are all service access doors closed? If necessary, close - 
S23 Are all bolted connections - particularly on the If necessary, retighten or replace - 
elevating cab - intact and tight?

rS2 Have any possible cable connections to If necessary, disconnect - 


4 external power sources been disconnected?

rS2 Is the correct counterweight (ballast) installed If necessary, replace or secure again - 
5 and secured in place? with specified torque

S26 Are the boom components intact (corrosion, If necessary, repair or replace - 
cracks)?

S27 Are any bolts cracked or damaged? If necessary, replace - 


S28 Are the pipe rupture safeties (restraints) tight If necessary, replace - 
and intact?

5-6 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Commissioning - Checks before daily start-up

No. Visual checks Steps to take Chapt 


er
S29 Is there enough grease in the central If necessary, refill 5.5.4 
lubrication system?

S30 Are the lubrication lines intact and all If necessary, replace, clean and - 
lubrication points being greased? lubricate

S31 Are the hydraulic lines and hoses secured in If necessary, tighten fasteners - 
place?

S32 Is the slewing mechanism undamaged and Repair or actuate pinion lubrication if - 
lubricated sufficiently? necessary.

S33 Is the slewing ring filling cover (internal teeth) If necessary, re-install and refill - 
in place and is there enough grease? grease

S34 Inspect the positive stops for the steering for If necessary, replace - 
wear.

S35 Inspect the power cable track for wear. If necessary, replace - 
S36 Is the pump distributor gearbox sealed? Repair if necessary - 

825 + 830 / 01.2010 5-7


Commissioning - Tests before start-up

5.5 Tests before start-up


Note
Sections 5.5.2, 5.5.5, 5.5.6, and 5.5.7 are omitted for electric motors!

5.5.1 Checking the windshield washer level


Note
The reservoir for cleaning fluid for the washer system is located behind
the front left-hand service access door.
Always fill the reservoir with washer system anti-freeze.

1 Windshield washer container 2 3 4


2 Service access door lock

Closing the service 1 Carefully press and hold the lock button (3) on the lock (2).
access door
2 Close the service access door (4).

WARNING
If the lock button (3) is not pressed when the service access door
is closed, the lock will be damaged!

5-8 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Commissioning - Tests before start-up

5.5.2 Check fuel level


Note
The fuel fill level can be determined with two different ways:
 with the indicator on the right next to the filler neck (rough indication)
 with the SENNEBOGEN diagnostics system in the initial mask, see
Section6.3.16

1 2
1 Filler strainer
2 Control displays

Note
Fill the tank with the specified grade of fuel. Clean fuel is essential for
trouble-free operation of the diesel engine.

Notes on quality and fuel selection


Observe the notes in the operating instructions of the engine
manufacturer.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 5-9


Commissioning - Tests before start-up

5.5.3 Lubricating the lubrication points manually


Note
More information can be found in Section3.4.

5.5.4 Check fill level in central lubrication system.


The central lubrication system automatically lubricates the slew track of
the slewing mechanism as well as the bearings of the equipment. The
lubrication cycle is pre-set at the factory.
Note
The preset lubricating cycle can be shortened. See the documentation
on the CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM in Chapter 10 of the operating
manual.

1 Threaded cover - replenish grease


2 Grease reservoir - note MIN/MAX markings
3 Grease nipple – Replenish grease

5 - 10 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Commissioning - Tests before start-up

5.5.5 Check the quantity of grease on the slewing ring teeth

Fig. Locking bar

Fig. Swivel connection

825 + 830 / 01.2010 5 - 11


Commissioning - Tests before start-up

Danger
Danger to life through shearing or crushing forces!
Make sure that there is no one within the danger area of the suspended
cab. The danger area is the area

 on and under the cab,


 on/under the mechanical cab supporting structure.
Maintenance work in this hazardous area is only to be performed if the
cab is secured with a locking bar against dropping suddenly or lowering
unintentionally.

1 Rotate the upper structure counterclockwise away from the


direction of travel by 360°.
2 Continue rotating the upper structure counterclockwise until
the boom is oriented transverse to the undercarriage (90° with
respect to the direction of travel).
3 Raise the cab.
4 Have the cab secured with a locking bar (1) by a second
person.
5 Remove cover plate (2).
6 A mound of grease must be visible (min. 20 mm). If necessary,
refill with grease.
7 Replace cover plate (2).
8 Remove the locking bar (1).

5 - 12 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Commissioning - Tests before start-up

5.5.6 Checking the hydraulic oil level

Machine in park position

1 Lower suspended loads and jib to the ground.


2 Position machine horizontally.
3 Fully retract all hydraulic cylinders.
4 Put the machine in park position. Retract support cylinders.
5 Shut down drive engine.
6 Open the service access door on the right.
7 Check oil level at the oil level indicator (1):
The oil level must reach to the upper marking (MAX).
8 De-pressurizing hydraulic system.
9 Top up hydraulic oil, if required:
– Open the cover plate.
– Unscrew screw cap of oil filler strainer.
– Top up hydraulic oil and re-check.
– Re-tighten screw cap.
Close the cover plate.
10 Close the service access door on the right.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 5 - 13


Commissioning - Tests before start-up

5.5.7 Check and drain the fuel system


WARNING
 Do not handle open flames when working on the fuel system! No
smoking!
 Also comply with the notes in the operating instructions of the engine
manufacturer.

1
2

1 Fuel filler filter cartridge


2 Drain valve

5 - 14 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Commissioning - Tests before start-up

1 Open rear right service access door.


2 Set a suitable catch container under the water container (2)
of the fuel filter cartridge.
3 Open drain valve (3).
4 Drain the water and debris out of the water container.
5 Shut off the drain valve again.
6 Close the service access door at the right, rear.

Note
The filter cartridge must be changed after draining the water five times.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 5 - 15


Commissioning - Tests before start-up

5.5.8 Checking engine oil level.


Note
Observe the notes in the operating instructions of the engine
manufacturer.

1
1 Oil dipstick handle

1 Position machine horizontally.


2 Run engine for approx. 2 minutes until the system is filled with
oil.
3 Shut down drive engine.
4 Open the service access door on the right.
5 Pull out oil dipstick and wipe off using a clean, lint-free cloth.
6 Insert oil dipstick up to stop and pull out again.
7 Check oil level (handle to top!):
The oil level must lie between the lower marking (MIN) and the
upper marking (MAX).

5 - 16 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Commissioning - Tests before start-up

8 If necessary top up with oil of the specified grade.


9 Insert oil dipstick up to stop and pull out again.
10 Close the service access door on the right.

5.5.9 Check coolant level

WARNING !
Danger of injury from scalding!
Check only when the cooling system has cooled.

2
4
1
1 Service panel
2 Handle
3 Hand screw
4 Cap
Check coolant level and/
or antifreeze
1 Allow drive engine and cooler to cool down.
2 Unscrew the two hand screws (3).
3 Grab the service panel (1) by the handle (2) and remove.
4 Pace large, thick cloths on the cap (4) of the coolant
expansion tank and open it carefully in order to equalize the
pressure.
5 Check antifreeze and coolant level, top up if necessary.
Mixing ratio: 50% antifreeze, 50% water. Frost resistance to -
36 °C (- 33 °F).
6 Close the cap on the expansion tank.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 5 - 17


Commissioning - Check water heating coolant level (Optional)

7 Replace the service panel and secure using the hand screws.

5.6 Check water heating coolant level (Optional)


Note
The expansion tank for the water heater is located behind the left-hand
rear service door.

1 2
1 Coolant level indicator
2 Cap

Check coolant level and/


or antifreeze
1 Allow the water heater to cool.
2 Open rear left service access door.
3 Check coolant level at the coolant level indicator (1): The
coolant level must reach to the upper marking (MAX).
4 Use a large, thick cloth to surround the cap (2) and open it
carefully to let off the pressure.
5 Check antifreeze and coolant level, top up if necessary.
Mixing ratio: 50% antifreeze, 50% water. Frost resistant to - 40
°C (- 40 °F).
6 Close the cap on the expansion tank.
7 Close the service access door at the left, rear.

5 - 18 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Commissioning - Switch on machine - Diesel engine

5.7 Switch on machine - Diesel engine

5.7.1 Safety instructions


Observe the safety notes before starting machine.
DANGER
 Danger of injury!
Keep cab door and service access doors closed.
 Before starting the engine, ensure that there is no one within the
danger area.
 The exhaust emission of diesel engines is damaging to health. Only
run engine outdoors or in well-ventilated areas.
 Do not start engine if a warning sign is present on the operating
elements.
 Adjust driver's seat, steering column and mirror to the correct
position.
 Fit restraint belt correctly.
 Close the cab doors.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 5 - 19


Commissioning - Switch on machine - Diesel engine

5.7.2 Restraint belt


The machine is equipped with a lap belt. The belt complies with
standards SAE J 386 (USA) and FMVSS 209 (EU).
WARNING
 Check belt for signs of wear before starting to operate the machine.
Immediately exchange a damaged belt.
 Clean dirty belt using water.
 Do not twist belt when fastening.
 Pass belt as low as possible around the hips, not around the
stomach.

1 Push metal catch (1) into belt buckle (2).


An audible click indicates that the belt has engaged.
2 To release belt, press red button (3) on belt buckle (2).

5 - 20 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Commissioning - Switch on machine - Diesel engine

5.7.3 Start engine


DANGER
Danger of intoxication!
Only run the engine outdoors or in well-ventilated areas. Breathing
inexhaust fumes is hazardous to your health It may lead to loss of
consciousness and death.
Control panel
right rear

3
1
4

SENNEBOGEN
Diagnostic
System (SDS)

1 Perform daily checks in accordance with Section5.4.


2 Insert key into ignition lock (2) and turn to position "1".
– The SDS runs a short self-test.
– The coolant temperature and fuel level are now indicated
on the SDS display (3).
– No fault messages are to be in the SDS when starting the
engine.
3 After completing the SDS self test, turn the ignition key to the
right (position "II") to start the engine.
4 Press menu button -down- (5) on the SDS.
– The engine oil pressure and the engine rpm are shown on
the display of the SDS.
Press the menu button -up- (4) to return to the coolant
temperature and fuel level.
5 Set the desired engine rpm using knob (1).

825 + 830 / 01.2010 5 - 21


Commissioning - Switch on machine - Diesel engine

Position Ignition key position Meaning


Ignition key
P Enable filling pump
0 Ignition OFF
I Ignition ON
II Start engine

Note
Release the safety lever if necessary to enable the hydraulic function
(see also Section6.3.4 SICHERHEITSHEBEL).

5 - 22 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Commissioning - Switch on machine - Diesel engine

5.7.4 Bring machine up to operating temperature

Guidelines values for Ambient temperature Warm-up Max. engine speed


warm-up period range period
Down to 0 °C (32 °F) approx. 15 Nominal speed - 250 rpm -
1
min.
(nominal speed, see
- 20 °C (- 4 °F) -... 0 °C (32 approx. 30 Chapter 4)
°F) min.

Procedure  Allow the engine to run at idle speed for 3 minutes after starting.
Warning up the engine Additional warm-up time can be required at temperatures under 0°C
(32 °F).
 Then increase the engine rpm in steps up to the
Increase nominal speed -250 rpm (not under load)
 If approx. 20°C (54 °F) water temperature has been achieved, put a
load on the engine by carefully actuating hydraulic functions and
continue to warm-up the machine.
 The machine can be loaded if the temperatures indicated below
have been achieved.

Reverse fan

With optional equipment, the fan reverses at under 0 °C (32 °F):


Change the direction of the fan several times during the warming up
phase. This will feed hot air from the engine to the micro filter (in front
of the cooler) and blow out the ice.

Note
If the hydraulics are still slow to respond after the warm-up period,
operate for a further 15 minutes at reduced speed.
The following temperatures should be displayed before operating the
machine at full speed:
 Hydraulic oil: about 30 °C (86 °F)
 Water: about 35 °C (95 °F).

CAUTION
Not warming up the engine and the machine can result in damage to
the engine, hydraulic pump, hydraulic motor, hydraulic oil cooler and
hydraulic tank.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 5 - 23


Commissioning - Switch on machine - Diesel engine

5.7.5 Jump start


The machine is equipped with a 24-volt starting system. Ensure that the
external power source has the same voltage.
CAUTION
If a power source with a higher voltage is used, this can cause serious
damage to the machine's electrical system.

1 Actuate battery isolator switch to interrupt the power supply.


2 Detach battery cover.
3 Connect the positive terminal (+) of the power source to
appropriate
jump leads.
4 Using a jump lead, connect the negative terminal (-) of the
donor battery to the engine block or to a solid, unpainted metal
part of the receiving vehicle that is connected to the engine
block.
5 Actuate the battery isolator switch to regenerate the power
supply.
6 Start engine acc. to Section5.7.3
7 Switch on the electrical consumer (protection against
overvoltage). .
8 Dismantling::
– Detach jump lead from negative terminal (-).
– Detach jump lead from negative terminal (-).
9 – Switch off the electrical consumer.
10 Replace battery cover.

WARNING
 Explosion hazard!
Avoid excessive heating by fire, open light or smoking.
 Battery acid is corrosive.
Avoid any contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Rinse acid
splashes and spills with clean water immediately. A visit to the
doctor can be necessary.
 When working on electrical system, adhere to current regulations
and the accident prevention regulations.

5 - 24 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Commissioning - Switching the machine off - Diesel engine

5.8 Switching the machine off - Diesel engine

5.8.1 Switching off engine


Note
Switching off the driving engine without allowing a cooling down phase
may cause heat storage and overheating of engine parts and especially
the turbocharger. Therefore, allow the engine to cool down before
switching off:
 Lower engine speed to approx. 50 % of the rated speed (see
Chapter 4).
 Allow machine to run for another approx. 5-10 minutes.
Non-observance may cause increased wear to the engine and cooling
system.

1 Park the machine on a firm surface.


2 Lower suspended loads and lower boom if necessary.
3 Lower engine speed to 50 % of the rated speed in order that
the engine and cooling system are not damaged.
4 Allow engine to run for another approx. 5-10 minutes.
5 Turn ignition key to position "0" and remove.
6 If necessary, pull back safety lever.
7 Secure the machine area (lights, warning triangle, chocks,
etc.).

825 + 830 / 01.2010 5 - 25


Commissioning - Decommissioning - Diesel engine

5.9 Decommissioning - Diesel engine


Proceed as follows if the machine is to be decommissioned for a
prolonged period.

1 Choose as dry and dust-free storage location as possible.


2 Position the machine on level ground.
If a location on level ground cannot be found, secure the
machine additionally using chocks.
3 Switch off machine according to Section5.8.
4 Check the machine for leaks (coolant, oil, etc.).
5 Clean machine according to maintenance instructions.
Ensure that cleaning agents do not attack the seals nor enter
the slewing mechanism!
6 Replenish operating fluids and lubricants; for levels see
maintenance instructions.
7 Lubricate machine according to maintenance instructions.
Lubricate the swivel connections while slowly rotating the
superstructure (fill grease supply if necessary).
8 Switch the battery isolator switch off or disconnect the battery
poles.
9 Protect bright metal parts (e.g. piston rods of hydraulic
cylinders), see maintenance instructions.

Note
Admissible ambient temperatures in accordance with Chapter 4.

CAUTION!
Check the seals every 6 months.

5 - 26 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Commissioning - Preservation and storage - Diesel engine

5.10 Preservation and storage - Diesel engine


Proceed as follows if the machine is to be preserved or stored for a
longer period of time:

1 Select the storage location so that there are no predictable


hazards.
2 Park attachment equipment on wooden blocks to prevent them
from freezing in.
3 Perform maintenance for 2000 hours of operation (annual).
4 Clean and dry all blank surfaces thoroughly (e.g. hydraulic
cylinder piston rods).
5 Preserve all blank surfaces and mounting joints with anti-
corrosive agent. The protective film must cover the surface
completely without any bare spots.
6 Check the diesel fuel for shelf life (min. -40 °C / -40 °F).
7 Fill the fuel and hydraulic oil tanks up to the maximum fill levels.
8 Check the cooling system for sufficient antifreeze.
The antifreeze portion must be at least 60% and maximum
65%.
Do not empty the cooling system under any
circumstances!
9 Prepare the diesel engine for storing. Also comply with the
notes in the operating instructions of the engine manufacturer.
10 Put a warning sign on the engine and on the cab indicating the
status of the machine preservation.
11 If the machine is to be stored at temperatures under -40 °C (-
40 °F) for a longer period of time, all LCD displays should be
removed and stored in a warmer location.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 5 - 27


Commissioning - Switch on machine - Electric motor

5.11 Switch on machine - Electric motor

5.11.1 Safety instructions


Observe the safety notes before starting machine.
DANGER
 Danger of injury!
Keep cab door and service access doors closed.
 Before starting the engine, ensure that there is no one within the
danger area.
 Do not start engine if a warning sign is present on the operating
elements.
 Adjust driver's seat, steering column and mirror to the correct
position.
 Fit restraint belt correctly.
 Close the cab doors.

5.11.2 Restraint belt


The machine is equipped with a lap belt. The belt complies with
standards SAE J 386 (USA) and FMVSS 209 (EU).
WARNING
 Check belt for signs of wear before starting to operate the machine.
Immediately exchange a damaged belt.
 Clean dirty belt using water.
 Do not twist belt when fastening.
 Pass belt as low as possible around the hips, not around the
stomach.

1 Push metal catch (1) into belt buckle (2).


An audible click indicates that the belt has engaged.
2 To release belt, press red button (3) on belt buckle (2).

5 - 28 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Commissioning - Switching the machine off - Electric motor

5.12 Switching the machine off - Electric motor

5.12.1 Switching the motor off

4
3

1
1 Ignition lock 3 Engine "On"
2 Engine "Off"

1 Lower suspended loads and lower boom if necessary.


2 Switch off the engine with the pushbutton (2). The "green"
indicator lamp (3) goes out.
3 Switch off main switch at the electric switch cabinet (see
Section2.3.5).
4 Turn ignition key to position "0" and remove.
5 If necessary, pull back safety lever.
6 Secure the machine area (lights, warning triangle, etc.).

WARNING
Please read the accompanying safety and commissioning instructions
of the engine manufacturer!

825 + 830 / 01.2010 5 - 29


Commissioning - Decommissioning - Electric motor

5.13 Decommissioning - Electric motor


Proceed as follows if the machine is to be decommissioned for a
prolonged period.

1 Choose as dry and dust-free storage location as possible.


2 Position the machine on level ground.
If a location on level ground cannot be found, secure the
machine additionally using chocks.
3 Switch off machine according to Section5.11.
4 Check the machine for leaks (coolant, oil, etc.).
5 Clean machine according to maintenance instructions.
Ensure that cleaning agents do not attack the seals nor enter
the slewing mechanism!
6 Replenish operating fluids and lubricants; for levels see
maintenance instructions.
7 Lubricate machine according to maintenance instructions.
Lubricate the swivel connections while slowly rotating the
superstructure (fill grease supply if necessary).
8 Protect bright metal parts (e.g. piston rods of hydraulic
cylinders), see maintenance instructions.

Note
Admissible ambient temperatures in accordance with Chapter 4.

CAUTION!
Check the seals every 6 months.

5 - 30 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Commissioning - Preservation and storage - Electric motor

5.14 Preservation and storage - Electric motor


Proceed as follows if the machine is to be preserved or stored for a
longer period of time:

1 Select the storage location so that there are no predictable


hazards.
2 Park attachment equipment on wooden blocks to prevent them
from freezing in.
3 Perform maintenance for 2000 hours of operation (annual).
4 Clean and dry all blank surfaces thoroughly (e.g. hydraulic
cylinder piston rods).
5 Preserve all blank surfaces and mounting joints with anti-
corrosive agent. The protective film must cover the surface
completely without any bare spots.
6 Fill the hydraulic oil tanks up to the maximum fill levels.
7 Check the cooling system for sufficient antifreeze.
The antifreeze portion must be at least 60% and maximum
65%.
Do not empty the cooling system under any
circumstances!
8 Prepare the electric motor for storing. Also comply with the
notes in the operating instructions of the engine manufacturer.
9 Put a warning sign on the engine and on the cab indicating the
status of the machine preservation.
10 If the machine is to be stored at temperatures under -40 °C (-
40 °F) for a longer period of time, all LCD displays should be
removed and stored in a warmer location.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 5 - 31


Commissioning - Starting up operating again

5.15 Starting up operating again


Proceed as follows if you want to put the machine back into operation:

1 Remove the anti-corrosive agent using a suitable means, e.g.


with a pressure washer and the respective cleaning additives
(be careful around sensitive and electronic components!).
2 All bare surfaces and hinged joints are to be oiled or greased
according to the service measures indicated in the lubrication
plan.
3 Check oil levels for sufficient fill quantities (e.g. hydraulic
system, drive motor).
4 Check the fill level and mixture of the anti-freeze in the cooling
system.
5 Check the machine thoroughly for leaks.
6 Check the entire machine (equipment, chassis, etc.) for
damages.
7 Install the LCD displays again if necessary.
8 Check all safety equipment (brakes, signal lights, lighting, etc.)
for proper functionality.
9 Investigate hazardous areas at the work site, identify them and
secure sufficiently.
10 Leveling the machine.
11 Warm up the machine sufficiently before starting work. See
chapter "Bringing the machine to operating temperature":

5.16 Disposal
In case you must dispose of the machine, please contact
SENNEBOGEN customer service.

5 - 32 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Safety instructions

6 Operation
6.1 Safety instructions
DANGER
 Read Chapter 1 SICHERHEIT.
Before start-up, carry out checks according to
Section5.4 .
 Persons working on or with the machine must be trained or
instructed for that purpose. Operation and deployment may only be
carried out by trained personnel.
 The following applies for all work:
Work only if the work area is level and solid enough.
 Proceed with utmost caution if you override the jib end limit or other
safety cut-out.
 Ensure that there is no one in the danger zone.
 Maintain safety distance to overhead lines.
 Only operate the machine from the driver's seat.
 When switching the attachment (e.g. grabber), take the pressure off
of the hydraulic system.
 Do not transport persons on the machine.
 Consider environment conditions, e.g. poor visibility, wind speeds,
etc.
 Use the specific lifting capacity tables for that machine.
 Note performance specification.
 Check that anchorage points have a sufficient safe working load.
 Observe guide signals as necessary.
 If visibility is poor, ensure that a guide is used for giving the required
signs when reversing.
 Before moving onto ramps or inclines, make sure to obtain the
maximum permitted values from SENNEBOGEN.
 Position boom in direction of travel during long journeys.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6-1


Operation - Driver's cab/cab with platform, raising

6.2 Driver's cab/cab with platform, raising

1
2
8*
3

4 9

5
6 10

7*
11

Emergency exit

12

1 Working light 8* 24 V socket (rotary beacon


connection)
2 Windshield wiper, roof
9 Emergency exit - Rear window
3 Windshield wiper, top
10 Sliding door
4 Front window top, adjustable
11 Gallery
5 Front window bottom
12 Hammer - emergency exit
6 Door lock and handle
7* Windshield wiper, bottom

*: Optional model / special function


Note
In an emergency, you can exit via the rear window (9). Use the
emergency hammer (12) to break the rear window.

6-2 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Driver's cab/cab with platform, raising

Sliding door

1
2

The sliding door (1) can be latched in the open position on the side
panel of the cab. You can release the latch by pulling on the release
lever (2) on the inside of the door.

Front windshield

Opening front windshield: Tip forwards. The top window wiper pivots
ahead with the window. Press on both buttons (4) and tip the window
ahead. The two shock absorbers hold it in position. Pull the two handles
(3) on the window frame inward to close it. Ensure that the front window
latches in place again.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6-3


Operation - Driver's cab/cab with platform, raising

Interior lighting A switch (5) turn the lighting (6) on and off.

5 6
Windshield washer The windshield wipers are operated via the switch on the top right
system control panel. The container for cleaning fluid for the window washer
system is located behind the front left-hand service door. Always fill the
reservoir with window anti-freeze agent.

radio The radio (7) and the speaker (8) are located behind the driver's seat
under the cab roof.

7
8
Note
More information can be obtained from the radio manufacturer.

Document jacket A SENNEBOGEN jacket holding the machine documentation is located


in the cab.

6-4 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Driver's cab/cab with platform, raising

6.2.1 Driver's seat


CAUTION
 In order to avoid dangerous situations, check that all settings are
locked in place properly before putting the vehicle into operation.
 The setting mechanisms for the driver's seat should not be actuated
during operation.
 To prevent injury, no objects are to be stored within the pivot-range
of the driver's seat.
 Functionality testing should be performed at least as often as the
maintenance intervals of the vehicle.
Note
To prevent damage to the driver's back, the weight setting should be
changed to match the weight of the driver, each time driver's are
switched.

Note
Bolted joints should be checked regularly for solid seating. The seat
jiggling may be caused by a loose bolt or other defect. If irregularities
are found in the functionality of the seat (e.g. in the suspension of the
seat), call an authorized professional immediately to rectify the
problem. Non-compliance leads to hazards to your health and
increased risk of accident.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6-5


Operation - Driver's cab/cab with platform, raising

Air-suspended driver's
seat

8
9

11 10
5
3
4 12
1, 2

1 Weight adjustment
2 Height adjustment
3 Seat depth adjustment (optional)
4 Seat tilt adjustment (optional)
5 Length adjustment (optional)
6 Head rest (optional)
7 Seat heating (optional)
8 Back (spine) support (optional)
9 Arm rests (optional)
10 Arm rest tilt (optional)
11 Backrest tilt
12 Horizontal suspension

6-6 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Driver's cab/cab with platform, raising

Standard driver's seat

8
6
9
5

10
4
3 11
1,2
12

1 Weight adjustment (optional)


2 Height adjustment
3 Seat tilt adjustment (optional)
4 Seat depth adjustment (optional)
5 Arm rest tilt (optional)
6 Arm rests (optional)
7 Head rest / back extension (optional)
8 Seat heating (optional)
9 Lumbar support (optional)
10 Backrest adjustment (optional)
11 Horizontal suspension (optional)
12 Length adjustment

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6-7


Operation - Operating elements

6.3 Operating elements

6.3.1 Overview with steering wheel control


Steering wheel control

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 Pedals 5 Seat adjustment


2 Steering column 6 Control lever, left-hand
3 Steering wheel 7 Lower air outlet vent
4 Control lever, right-hand 8 Safety lever

6-8 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Pedals

1* 2 3 4 5 6 7

1* Slewing gear holding brake lock


2 Foot-rest 6 Brake pedal - Driving action
3 Steering column 7 Drive pedal
4 Release the steering column 8 Travel - forwards
lock
9 Travel - reverse
5 Release the brake pedal

*: Optional model / special function

Note
The slewing gear holding brake is a holding brake for the
superstructure but is not a service brake or a drive brake. A symbol is
illuminated in the SDS when switched on.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6-9


Operation - Operating elements

6.3.2 Overview with joystick control


Joy stick steering

1 2 3 4 5 6
1 Pedals 4 Control lever, left-hand
2 Control lever, right-hand 5 Lower air outlet vent
3 Seat adjustment 6 Safety lever

2
3
4*
1*

Pushbutton:
1* Magnet system OFF 3 Steer, to right
2 Steer, to left 4* Magnet system ON or
Magnet system ON/OFF

*: Optional model / special function

6 - 10 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Pedals

1* 2 3 4
1* Slewing gear holding brake 4 Drive pedal
2 Release the brake pedal 5 Travel - forwards
lock
6 Travel - reverse
3 Brake pedal - Driving action

Note
The slewing gear holding brake is a holding brake for the
superstructure but is not a service brake or a drive brake. A symbol is
illuminated in the SDS when switched on.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 11


Operation - Operating elements

6.3.3 Overview with crawler steering


Lever/pedals
a
a

b
b

1* 2 3 4 2 5 3

1* Turn-cylinder ULM 5 Floor window


2 Driving left a Travel, forwards
3 Driving right b Travel, backwards
4 Foot-rest

*: Optional model / special function

6 - 12 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

6.3.4 Safety lever


The safety lever (1) serves as a safety device.

Safety lever released


(pushed forward)

When safety lever is released (see illustration)


 all hydraulic functions are available.
 all work maneuvers can be carried out.
Note
The slewing gear holding brake remains open after releasing the safety
lever (pushed ahead), if the "right" switch has previously been actuated
in the right control panel.
Activate the slewing gear holding brake by pressing the "left" switch in
the right-hand control panel (see Section6.5.9).

Safety lever
actuated
(pulled back)

Note
All hydraulic functions are deactivated with the safety lever actuated.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 13


Operation - Operating elements

6.3.5 Control lever, left-hand

2 Pushbutton:
3
1 Horn
1
4 2 Grab, slew left
3 Grab, slew right
4 The safety end limit cut-out
"Arm in“ is to be bypassed, if available,
which bypasses the jib and the hoisting
limits as well.

Movement directions

Note
The bypasses for the safety end limit cut-out "Jib in" are series, "Jib out"
and "Hoist up/down" are optional.

DANGER
All safety cut-outs in the equipment are deactivated.

6 - 14 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

6.3.6 Control lever, right-hand

2 Pushbutton:
3
1* Magnet system OFF
4
1 2**Steer, to left
3**Steer, to right
4* Magnet system ON or
Magnet system ON/OFF

Movement directions

DANGER
Danger of death by bypassing the safety limit shutdown “Jib retract”!
Attachments and load elements can penetrate the driver's cab.
Proceed with utmost caution.
Watch attachments and load constantly. Operation is the sole
responsibility of the machine operator.
Please also read notes in Section6.5.12.

*: Optional model / special function


**: Optional version, only with joystick steering

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 15


Operation - Operating elements

6.3.7 Additional displays


Analog operating hours counter SDS

Tool Control Generator and Magnet System

Auxiliary heater,
Water heater Camera

LML

Note
More information can be found in Section6.5 and Chapter 10.

6 - 16 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

6.3.8 Overview of control panels

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 17


Operation - Operating elements

6.3.9 Control panel, next to the driver's seat


Version with
full stabilization

1 3

Version with
single stabilizer
(optional)

4 6

5 7

1 Ashtray
2 Storage compartment
3 Full stabilization lever
(all stabilizers are extended/retracted simultaneously)
4 Single stabilizer left front
5 Single stabilizer left rear
6 Single stabilizer right front
7 Single stabilizer right rear

6 - 18 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Version with
telescoping
undercarriage (optional)

1 Retract/extend telescoping undercarriage


2 Ashtray

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 19


Operation - Operating elements

6.3.10 Control panel Engine/Machine

1*

5*
6*
7
8

1* Emergency Stop (not with electric motors)


2 Speed adjustment (not with electric motors)
3 Basic lighting
0 = Light off
1 = Parking light
2 = Low beam
3 = High beam
4 Ignition lock - Start engine
P = Enable fuel filling pump
0 = Ignition OFF
I = Ignition ON
II = Start engine
5* Emergency lowering - LML
6* Key switch Emergency lowering - LML
7 12V socket outlet
8 24V socket outlet

*: Optional model / special function

6 - 20 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Emergency lowering - The load moment limiter (LML) can be bypassed with the key switch
LML Emergency lowering - LML.
This may be required to move the machine out of the hazard zone if it
is not possible with load-minimizing functions (Jib in, Boom down).

DANGER
Danger of tipping!
Key switch Emergency loweringshould only be used in extreme
emergencies!

Note
The load moment limiter (LML) can be bypassed for 3 seconds only.
After a waiting time of 30 seconds, the load moment limiter (LML) can
be bypasses again for another 3 seconds.

Note
Bypassing the load moment limiter (LML) is completed only under full
responsibility of the machine operator.

1 Press button (5) in the right-hand control panel.


2 Turn the key switch (6) to the right in the right-hand control
panel and hold this position.
This bypasses the load moment limiter (LML).
3 By releasing the key switch (6), the load moment limiter (LML)
is activated again.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 21


Operation - Operating elements

6.3.11 Panel indicator lights, lower right

1* 6*

2 7

3*

4* 8

5*

1* Travel, forwards
2 Flasher left, right/hazard lights
3* Reverse fan
4* Magnet system control
5* Steering direction switch
6* Travel reverse
7 High beam
8 180° displacement

*: Optional model / special function

6 - 22 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Reverse fan status


indicator lamp Switch setting Indicator lamp
1 (right, single fan reversal) flashes
0 (middle, no fan reversal) not illuminated
2 (left, fan reversal every 60 min.) always illuminated

Note
The fan reversal indicator lamp (3) provides information on the status
of the fan drive controller and on faults in the fan system. A fault is
indicated with a flashing code. Contact SENNEBOGEN service in this
case.
In reversal operation, the indicator lamp flashes once per second.

Note
When the machine is in heavy use, the automatic fan reversal may
affect intercooling.
This could result in reduced performance from the diesel engine.
SENNEBOGEN During periods of heavy use, deactivate the automatic fan reversal.
recommends To do this, set the fan reversal switch to "manual".
Activate the fan reversal manually if full performance is not required
from the machine.
In general, the fan reversal must only be activated two to three times
per working day.

Travel forwards Lamp illuminated with selected travel direction - Forward.

Travel reverse Lamp illuminated with selected travel direction - Reverse.

Magnet system Illuminated with magnet system switched on.

Switch Illuminated with activated floating axle control if the superstructure is in


steering direction 0°- or 180°-position (+/- 5°) to the undercarriage.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 23


Operation - Operating elements

180° displacement Illuminated with active steering direction reversal if the boom is in the
area above the rear axle (90°-270° - position (+/- 7.5°)).

High beam Illuminated when headlight lit.

6 - 24 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

6.3.12 Control panel, right-hand bottom


Note
The maximum occupation of the panel is shown. The switches for
functions that are not available are covered with dummy covers.

3*

7*

8*

10* 11*

12*

1 Slewing gear holding brake 7* Cab "Out"


2 Driving speed 8* Cab "In"
slow/fast
9 Reverse fan
3* Flasher left/right
10*Dozer plate
(only with joystick steering)
11*Release telescoping
4 Floating axle lock
12*Diesel filter heating Off/On
5 Cab "Up"
6 Cab "Down"

*: Optional model / special function

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 25


Operation - Operating elements

Slewing gear holding The slewing gear holding brake is a holding brake for the
brake superstructure but is not a service brake or a working brake.
When switched on, the SDS also illuminated a symbol.

WARNING
Never rotate the upper structure when the slewing gear holding brake
is applied!

Floating axle lock The front axle is a floating axle. It can be blocked with a switch. After
releasing the lock (switch lit) travel surface unevenness can be
compensated by the floating axle.
Note
The front axle only has a defined pendulum path if the superstructure
is parallel wtih the undercarriage (0° and 180°). This minimizes the
danger of tipping. The boom can be over the front axle or over the rear
axle.
WARNING
 Danger of tipping!
Lock the floating axle when traveling with load.
 Unlock the floating axle when traveling on uneven terrain.

0° position 180° position

6 - 26 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Reverse fan The reverse airflow serves to clean the cooling fins of the combination
cooler. This requires that the switch is pressed as described below.
Loose contamination on the cooling ribs is blown out.

Switch setting Feature


1 (right) Jog function, single fan reversal for 30 seconds
0 (middle) Neutral position, no fan reversal
2 (left) Automatic function, every 60 minutes a fan
reversal for 30 seconds (switch latched in
place)

Note
To further clean the combination cooler, read the maintenance
instructions (see).

Diesel filter heating The diesel filter heating is used for preheating at low temperatures.
Off/On

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 27


Operation - Operating elements

6.3.13 Air conditioning control panel


Note
The machine is equipped with an automatic climate control system that
permits precise heating or cooling..

5 5

6 6

1 Fan speed selection switch


2 Air distribution selection switch
3 Temperature regulator
4 Temperature display (°C or °F)
5 Combination switch: Outside temperature display, Air
conditioning on/off
6 Outside/recirculating air switch
Note
The air conditioning can be operated with outside air or circulating
inside air.

Note
Keep windows and cab door closed to ensure effective air conditioning.
The air conditioner regulates the temperature in relation to the outside
temperature.

6 - 28 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Outside air mode When windows are misted, to dehumidify the cab.

Recirculating air mode Faster warm-up of cab and higher limit temperature.
The air in the cab interior is re-circulated, i.e. very little fresh air is drawn
in from outside. Do not leave in this mode for longer than 15 minutes,
as the air quality in the cab will deteriorate significantly. Ensure that
there is a sufficient outside air supply.

Air conditioning system 1 Start driving engine.


- switch-on
2 Switch on fan (1) on right-hand control panel.
3 Open the air-inlet vents in the cab to prevent the evaporator
from icing up.
4 Set the switch for the air conditioning (5) on the right of
the control panel to cooling .
5 Set the desired temperature with the temperature controller (3)
on the right of the control panel.

Note
Switch on air conditioning system regularly. This greatly contributes to
the operation readiness.
Switch on air conditioning system once a month for at least 30 minutes
at maximum fan rate in this case; open windows and doors.

Change temperature 1 Press the combination swtich (5) for more than 5 seconds.
display °C/°F
2 The temperature display changes (°C <--> °F).

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 29


Operation - Operating elements

6.3.14 Control panel, right bottom (rear)


Note
The maximum occupation of the panel is shown. The switches for
functions that are not available are covered with dummy covers.

1*

2*

3*

1* Auxiliary heater
2* Vario Tool Open-0-Close
3* Vario Tool enable

*: Optional model / special function

Vario Tool Open-0- The Vario Tool lock is actuated. The switch to the left opens the lock,
Close switch to the right closes the lock. Neutral position in the middle.

WARNING
Never rotate the upper structure when the slewing gear holding brake
is applied!

Vario Tool enable The Vario Tool is enabled. A signal tone sounds.

6 - 30 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Auxiliary heater

1 2

3 4

5
1 Reverse control button 4 OK button
2 Forward control button 5 Display
3 Activation button

Note
More information can be found in Chapter 10.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 31


Operation - Operating elements

6.3.15 Control panel, top right on the ceiling


Note
The maximum occupation of the panel is shown. The switches for
functions that are not available are covered with dummy covers.
Front part

2*
3*

6*

7*

8*

9*

10

11*

12*

13*

14*

1 Work floodlights Cab 9* Beacon lights


2* Working lights Superstructure 10 Flashing warning lamps
3* Working lights Equipment 11*ECO switch
4 Wiper rear window 12* Automatic idle
5 Front window washer system 13*Slewing ring lubrication
(not available)
6* Skylight wiper
14*Central lubrication
7* Roof light washer system
8* Wiper rear window bottom

*: Optional model / special function

6 - 32 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

ECO Switch With the ECO switch activated, the drive motor speed is set to 92% of
the nominal speed. This reduces the fuel consumption and noise
generation.

Note
When working with magnetic equipment, turn off the ECO switch!

Automatic idle The automatic idle control automatically decreases the rpm of the drive
engine if no operating actions are carried out for several seconds. Once
a control lever is actuated, the preset speed of the rpm adjustment is
immediately restored.
Note
The automatic idle function remains deactivated as long as the
magnetic equipment is on.

Slewing ring lubrication The slewing ring lubrication system lubricates the teeth of the slewing
ring. Lubrication can be actuated manually.

Central lubrication The central lubrication system automatically lubricates the slew track of
the slewing mechanism as well as the bearings of the equipment. The
lubrication cycle is pre-set at the factory.
Lubrication can be manually actuated in addition to the pre-set
lubrication cycle.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 33


Operation - Operating elements

Rear part
15*

16*

17

18*

19*

20*

21*

22*

23*

24*

25

15*Floating boom setting 21*Normal steering control -


0° position rear axle
16*Grabber function Off/On
22*All-wheel steering switch
17*Grabber control Off/On
23*Boom suspension system
18*Overload Off/On
24*Steering direction reversal
19*Magnet system Off/On
25*Load limit sensing control
20*Auxiliary limiting main boom
(GLR)
Off/On

*: Optional model / special function

6 - 34 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Float setting The floating position function depends on the working tool.
Boom Grabber floating position: The compact boom is raised at low speed
along with the "Close grabber" function. Scratching the grabber on the
ground is prevented this way.
Hammer floating position: The full weight of the jib affects the hammer.
The job cylinder is not pressurized in this case.
Grab control The Grab Control function can be used for controlling the pressure for
the "Grab Close" function.
A pressure reduction for "Grab Close" is only active if the working
movements "Grab Close" and "Pivot superstructure" or "Grab Close"
and "Hoist Up" are performed simultaneously. With the grabber closed,
no speed loss occurs with working movements "Pivot superstructure"
and "Hoist Up" this way.
– Grabber symbol always illuminated
– switch pressed, green LED also illuminated

Grab Grab closing pressure Pivot speed Hoisting


control for speed -
superstruct Compact
ure boom

Activate Grabber closes at fast fast


d maximum pressure.
Actuating the "Hoist Up"
or "Pivot" function as well
decreases the pressure
for "Grab Close" so that
no speed loss occurs in
the working movements.
deactivat Grabber closes at Slow Slow
ed maximum pressure.
Actuating the "Hoist Up"
or "Pivot" function may
cause speed loss in the
working movements in
worst case scenarios.

Note
If working with the machine equipment in a negative area (e.g.
unloading ships) or the load is to be stored up high or pivoted over a
large radius, it may be advantageous to active the grabber control. This
will achieve quicker working cycles.
Grab function When the grabber function is switched off, accidentally actuating the
functions "Grab Open/Grab Close" is prevented in magnet plate mode.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 35


Operation - Operating elements

Overload When the Overload warning unit is activated, a green LED is


illuminated on the respective switch. If the machine is in a critical area
(load too heavy, boom/jib extended too far), a horn signal sounds.

Magnet system Using the Magnet system switch, the optional magnet system can be
activated/deactivated.

Auxiliary limiting Use the Auxiliary limitation switch to activate/deactivate the optional
auxiliary limiting for "Hoist Up" and/or "Jib out" (Section6.5.11). This is
important when e.g. working with height limitations.

Control Road (2-wheel) steering. The steering is via the front wheel. The back
normal steering wheels remain straight (0°). Control: The rear wheels must be in the
straight position.

Switch Use the All-wheel steering switch to switch to all-wheel (Lamp is


All-wheel steering illuminated in the switch).

Boom suspension When driving with a load over longer distances, bouncing or rocking of
system the machine is prevented with the suspension for the boom cylinder.
This enables comfortable driving with a load.

6 - 36 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Steering direction When the Steering direction reversal is activated (Lamp is illuminated
reversal in the switch), the steering direction of the machine is switched
automatically.
I.e.: For the steering movement, the machine does not differentiate
between using the rear axle or the front axle.
DANGER
Danger of accident with deactivated Steering direction reversal (Lamp
not illuminated in the switch)!
If the boom is positioned above the rear axle, the driving actions of the
machine are reversed.
Be very careful if you want to work or move with deactivated Steering
direction reversal over the rear axle.

GLR The GLR system keeps the set engine speed constant under load. If a
problem occurs in the GLR system, it can be deactivated with the
switch.
The machine can continue in operation with minor power loss.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 37


Operation - Operating elements

6.3.16 SENNEBOGEN Diagnosis System (SDS)

A Display C Indicator and warning lights


B Keypad

Note
Additional information can be pulled up via the SDS, e.g. actual
hydraulic oil temperature.
Sensors on the machine monitor the current operating state and
transmit the measured data to the SDS. The measurement results are
evaluated in the SDS and are shown on the display automatically or
when a key is pressed. If irregularities occur on the machine, the
indicator and warning lights are activated.

Self test The SDS carries out a self-test after the ignition is switched on. All
LEDs are illuminated. The sensors are checked. Following this, the
SDS is ready to operate.
If the SDS detects a fault, the fault condition in indicated on the display
and via LEDs. Arrange for immediate rectification of faults through
SENNEBOGEN customer service.

Cleaning Do not clean the SDS with alcohol or liquids containing solvents!
These will corrode the plastic surface.

6 - 38 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Keypad (B) The keypad has 5 function keys. Information can be pulled up and
shown on the display using these keys. You can also use these to
change the screen mask and for acknowledging any possible error
messages that occur.

CAUTION
Faults or irregularities that are shown are to be rectified immediately (fill
fuel tank, clean/replace air filter, etc.). More significant faults are to be
rectified immediately by SENNEBOGEN service.

1 2 3 4 5

1 Up arrow (previous mask)


2 Down arrow (next mask)
3 Activate daily operating hours counter
4 Confirm (ENTER)
5 ESCAPE

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 39


Operation - Operating elements

Display (A) The screen is multifunctional. After switching the ignition on, it shows
the SENNEBOGEN logo, and the daily data in operating status,
respective symbols and a graphic view of the operating status
(depending on the mask) in the operating status.

Note
The SDS has a warning and indicator lamps on a colored background.
These are located under the keypad.

Symbol Meaning
warning lights
1 Air filter - contamination indicator

Contamination indicators:
Hydraulic oil return filter

HydroClean Superfine filtration system

Hydraulic pilot control filter

Coolant level

Hydraulic tank flap (Optional)

Hydraulic oil level

WARNING symbol

Indicator lights Symbol Meaning


Parking brake - accumulator charge
pressure

Slewing mechanism holding brake

6 - 40 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Note
The SDS screen is equipped with pictograms. These lamps are
illuminated and/or can be selected depending on the operational
status.

Pictograms Pictogram Meaning


Coolant temperature

Fill level - Diesel fuel

Engine oil pressure

Engine rpm

Hydraulic oil temperature

Battery voltage

Switch on daily operating hours counter


Switch off daily operating hours counter

Warning triangle, general


(in connection with other symbols)

Time

Date

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 41


Operation - Operating elements

Pictogram Meaning
Date/time setting and in connection with error
memory

Error message exists

Error memory

Number of error messages

Confirm (ENTER)

ESCAPE

Engine

6 - 42 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Sequential overview

000.0h
4 sec.
4.02

000.0h
4 sec.

000.0h
4 sec.

000.0h
4 sec.

5 sec.

+
SPN

5 sec. 5 sec.

SPN

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 43


Operation - Operating elements

Start-up mask

4.02 2

Automatic change
after 4 seconds

to screen 7
3 4 5
Screen 1

Coolant temperature 6
7
Fill level - Diesel fuel 8

1 SENNEBOGEN logo 5 Daily hours of operation


2 Software version (E.g.) 6 Coolant temperature
3 Time 7 Warning threshold Coolant
temperature too high
4 Date
8 Fill level - Diesel fuel

6 - 44 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Note
To switch from Screen 1 to Screens 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7, you must press
the ‘Arrow down key‘. Use the 'Arrow up key' to return to the previous
screen.

Screen 2

Engine oil pressure 1


2
Engine rpm 3

Screen 3

Hydraulic oil 4
5

Battery voltage 6

1 Engine oil pressure 4 Hydraulic oil temperature


2 Warning threshold Engine 5 Warning threshold Hydraulic
oil too low oil temperature too high
3 Engine rpm 6 Battery voltage

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 45


Operation - Operating elements

or:

Screen 4 1

Daily operating hours


counter 2

1 Daily operating hours counter


ON
2 Daily hours of operation

Note
Switching to mask 4 can be done at any time from masks 1, 2 and 3.
This is done by pressing the "Hourglass button".

Set daily hours of Press the "ENTER button" for four seconds . This resets the daily hours
operation counter to 0 of operation counter to 0.0 h.

Stopping or restarting Press the "Hourglass button", to stop or restart the daily hours of
the daily hours of operation counter.
operation counter

6 - 46 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Screen 5

Set time
IMPORTANT! Before setting the time and date, perform the
basic setting (see mask 7)!

Time 5 sec.

"Set date"

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 47


Operation - Operating elements

Setting the date

Date
EC version: DD.MM.YY
US version: YY.MM.DD

Screen 5

6 - 48 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Screen 6

Error messages

Machine error code Engine error code

1 2
3 SPN

5 sec.

4 SPN

8 9
5 6 7
1 Total error messages 6 Error detected: Date
2 selected error message 7 Error detected: Hours of
operation
3 error mess. not ack.
8 SPN error code (97)
4 error mess. ack.
9 FMI error code (3)
5 Error detected: Time

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 49


Operation - Operating elements

Note
In mask 6 you can read the number of error messages and the
respective diagnostic codes.
ATTENTION! To allocate the error messages and the respective
diagnostic codes properly, read the following diagnostic code list. Call
upon SENNEBOGEN customer service if you have questions and for
fault rectification.

Note
A severe error is indicated by the symbol with the dark background, the
pulsating buzzer and the illuminated red "!" warning symbol. The
buzzer will only stop after acknowledging the fault. The symbol will no
longer have the dark background but it will flash. As long as the fault is
active, the red warning sign will be illuminated on the right, under the
button field.

Note
The fault messages can be acknowledged by pressing the "ENTER
button" for 5 seconds but they are not deleted.

Note
The diagnostics codes indicated in the list are by no means complete.
Other diagnostics codes (flash codes) and possible disruptive influence
on the engine performance are located in the respective chapter of the
operating instructions for the respective engine manufacturer.

Note
Example of an engine error code (SPN/FMI diagnostics codes):
SPN = 100; FMI = 4: i.e. engine oil pressure sensor - short circuit
– SPN = Suspect Parameter Number
– FMI = Failure Mode Identifier

6 - 50 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

List of possible error


codes 101, 102 or 103 Coolant temperature

111, 112 or 113 Engine oil pressure

121, 122 or 123 Diesel fill level

131, 132 or 133 Hydraulic oil temperature

141, 142 or 143 Battery voltage

151 Air filter

161 Hydraulic oil return filter

171 HydroClean superfine filtration


system

181 Hydraulic pilot control filter

191 Coolant level

201 Hydraulic oil flap

211 Hydraulic oil level

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 51


Operation - Operating elements

Error memory

+
5 sec.

1 2 3

4
5
6

1 Error memory 5 Error acknowledged


2 Number of stored errors (10) 6 Error cleared
3 Selected error (7)
4 Error detected

Note
The error memory mask shows the storage location for faults registered
by the SDS. It provides information on the time of the fault, the
acknowledgement and the rectification.
Mask 6 must be active to open error memory 7. First, press the
"ESCAPE key", then add the "ENTER key" and hold both pressed
down for 5 seconds to enter this mask.
In this mask, selecting individual alarms is possible with the "arrow up
button". After pressing the "ESCAPE button", mask 6 appears again.

6 - 52 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Screen 7

1
Perform basic setting to screen 1
2

3 1 Temperature: °C or °F
2 Printing: bar or psi
3 Date: Day, Month, Year or
Year, Month, Day
5 sec.

Temperature

Pressure

"Change date"

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 53


Operation - Operating elements

Date

Start-up mask

6 - 54 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Indicator and warning The two indicator lights provide information on the current operating
lights (C) status (Slewing gear holding brake closed or accumulator pressure for
the parking brake built up).
The warning lights are illuminated if the SDS determines an irregularity.
The warning lights indicate two different priorities:
Priority 1: Switch off machine immediately according to Section5.8.
Rectify the irregularity immediately (e.g. check cooling system or
hydraulic system for leaks, fill with coolant/hydraulic oil).
Priority 2:Rectify irregularities as soon as possible (rectify by the end of
the work day at the latest - e.g. clean/replace air filter -). Clean/replace
air filter -). Indicated by the four top yellow warning lights.

1 2 3 4 5

a
10 b

8 7 6
Warning lights: 8 Hydraulic tank cover
(Optional)
1 Air filter - contamination
indicator 10 Coolant level
Replace indicators - hydraulic a Priority 2
system
b Priority 1
2 Hydraulic return filter
3 HydroClean
Indicating lights
4 Auxiliary control filter
6 Parking brake
5 ATTENTION - General (in Accumulator pressure
combination with symbols
9 Slewing mechanism holding
from the screen as well)
brake
7 Hydraulic oil level

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 55


Operation - Operating elements

Error displays on the screen

Symbol flashes, Cause Remedy


Buzzer sounds
and red "Attention" Hydraulic oil – Allow engine to run without load until
illuminates temperature too high hydraulic oil has cooled.
(>84 °C/183 °F)
Cooling fins on – Clean cooling fins on oil cooler.
hydraulic oil cooler
soiled
Hydraulic oil level too – Check oil level acc. to maintenance
low instructions.
– Top up hydraulic oil, if required .

Symbol flashes, Cause Remedy


Buzzer sounds and
red "Attention" Insufficient fuel in tank – Refuel machine acc. to Section6.16.
illuminates

Symbol flashes, Cause Remedy


Buzzer sounds
and red Engine overheating – Run engine at idling speed.
"Attention" illuminates Cooling fins on engine – Clean cooling fins on oil cooler.
oil cooler soiled
Fan drive loose or – Tighten fan drive; replace, if necessary.
defective
Coolant level too – Top up coolant according to
low maintenance instructions.
Engine switched off – After operating, allow engine to run in
without cooling phase. low idle for approx. 5-10 minutes before
switching off.

6 - 56 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

Symbol flashes, Cause Remedy


Buzzer sounds and
red "Attention" Motor oil pressure too – Shut down engine immediately.
illuminates low (<1.3 bar/18.9 psi) – Check engine oil level acc. to
maintenance instructions.
– Top up motor oil if necessary.
– If it happens again,
Notify SENNEBOGEN customer
service

Symbol flashes, Cause Remedy


Buzzer sounds and
Battery charge too weak – Check battery charge; recharge
red "Attention"
batteries or exchange, if necessary.
illuminates
– Check battery connections, tighten
terminals if necessary.
– Check the belt tension and tighten or
replace if necessary.

SDS buffer battery If the battery symbol appears on the start screen, there is a fault!

Voltage diplay <= 2.50V


Battery is too low!
Insert new battery! It is possible that system data will not be stored
securely anymore!

Voltage diplay >= 3.50V


Battery is defective or missing completely!
Install new battery! System data is no longer stored.

Note
Have the battery installed by an authorised SENNEBOGEN - Partner
of your choice.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 57


Operation - Operating elements

Warning and indicator lights

illuminate, Cause Remedy


warning buzzer
sounds Coolant level too low – Top up coolant.

Illuminates Cause Remedy


when
engine is Accumulator pressure – Have a hydraulic specialist check the
too low hydraulic system.

illuminates, Cause Remedy


buzzer sounds
Hydraulic oil level too low – Top up hydraulic oil

lights up Cause Remedy


Slewing gear holder – Deactivate slewing gear holding brake
brake applied

lights up Cause Remedy


Return filter is clogged – Check return filter; if necessary,
replace in accordance with
maintenance instructions.

lights up Cause Remedy


HydroClean Superfine – HydroClean Check micro-filter,
filter is plugged replace if necessary.

6 - 58 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Operating elements

lights up Cause Remedy


Auxiliary control filter is – Check auxiliary control filter, if
blocked necessary change acc. to
maintenance instructions.

lights up Cause Remedy


Air filter contaminated – Clean filter acc. to maintenance
instructions.
– If necessary, replace filter element.

Note
The indicator and warning lamp template foil cannot be exchanged. It
is possible however to print the template for the three free fields
individually with a laser printer. Remove the entire front plate and pull
or push the fields out or in.

Note
The internal battery for the SDS has a minimum life-span of three
years. Practice testing shows periods of up to 10 years however.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 59


Operation - Additional displays (special equipment)

6.4 Additional displays (special equipment)

6.4.1 SENNEBOGEN Tool Control


The SENNEBOGEN Tool Control enables operation of several working
tools (e.g. Grabber, Demolition hammer) with different requirements for
maximum permissible flow volumes and pressures.
The maximum permissible flow volume and pressure is adapted to the
respective working tool by the SENNEBOGEN Tool Control.
CAUTION
Before starting work, select the operating mode for the respective tool!

1 2 3 4
Selecting the operating
mode
1 Start engine acc. to Section5.7.3.
2 Loosen the safety lever (see Section6.3.4).

Note
After releasing the safety lever, the last selected tool is indicated on the
display (3).

3 Press buttons (1) and (2) and select the desired operating
mode.
The selected tool (operating mode) appears on the display (3).

Note
To change the setup parameters, use special tools and contact
SENNEBOGEN customer service if necessary.

6 - 60 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Additional displays (special equipment)

Note
If a button is pressed and held for a longer period of time, the button
lock is activated. The button lock can be triggered by simultaneously
pressing buttons (+) and (-).
If no button is pressed for a longer period of time, the display (3)
switches off (energy/screen-saver), the operation LED (4) continues to
be lit however. By pressing any button, the display (3) is activated
again.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 61


Operation - Additional displays (special equipment)

6.4.2 Load moment limiter (LML)

The machine is equipped with a load moment limiter (LML) as an


overload safety.

Danger
Working with switched off, bypassed or defective load moment
limitation is not allowed.

Note
More information can be found in Chapter 10.

6 - 62 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Additional displays (special equipment)

6.4.3 Generator and Magnet Systems


Note
The automatic idle function remains deactivated as long as the
magnetic equipment is on.

Note
More information can be found in Chapter 10.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 63


Operation - Additional displays (special equipment)

6.4.4 Camera/Monitor

Note
More information can be found in Chapter 10.

6 - 64 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Additional displays (special equipment)

6.4.5 Auxiliary heating / Water heater


The machine is equipped with an engine-independent water heater for
engine-heating and cab-pre-heating.
The electric water heater is set up in the factory and is controlled along
with the automatic air conditioning (see Section6.3.13).

Note
The battery power can be used by operating the water heater.

1
1 Control element for water heater

Note
More information can be found in Chapter 10.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 65


Operation - Additional displays (special equipment)

Maintenance flap
rear, left

WARNING
Fault!
If the "red" indicator lamp is illuminated, the coolant level is low in the
water heater. The electric water heater (2) is then deactivated by the
safety cut-out.
Check the coolant level according to Section5.5.9.

6 - 66 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Additional displays (special equipment)

6.4.6 Low-temperature package


Auxiliary heater/ The machine is equipped with an engine-independent water heater for
Water heater engine-heating and cab-pre-heating.
Note
The battery power can be used by operating the water heater.

1 Control element for water heater

Note
More information can be found in Chapter 10.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 67


Operation - Additional displays (special equipment)

Heater for The machine is equipped with a heated water separator (1).
Water separator

1 2

In order to activate the heater for the water separator (1), activate the
switch (2) in the right-hand control panel.

1 Start engine acc. to Section5.7.3.


2 Switch on the heater for the water separator with switch (2).
– The indicator lamp in switch (2) is illuminated until the fuel
has achieved operating temperature (=Thermostat).

6 - 68 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Additional displays (special equipment)

Hydraulic oil pre-heater The hydraulic oil pre-heater (1) is attached to the hydraulic tank. The
heating time is significantly reduced by the hydraulic oil pre-heater.

2
1

To activate the hydraulic oil pre-heater, the socket (3) on the left-hand
storage space of the machine must be connected to the power supply
(230 V).
Sennebogen supplies only the plug, not the cable for the power supply
to the socket (3)!
The cable must be connected by trained specialist personnel.
Set the temperature using the regulator (2) on the thermostat (pre-
setting: 20 °C (68 °F)).
The thermostat switches off once the operating temperature has been
reached.

Note
To increase the effectiveness of the hydraulic oil preheating, retract all
hydraulic cylinders.

Warning
Maintenance and repair work must be carried out by trained specialist
personnel.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 69


Operation - Additional displays (special equipment)

Batter heater The machine is equipped with a battery heater.

To activate the battery heater, the socket (3) on the left-hand storage
space of the machine must be connected to the power supply (230 V).
Sennebogen supplies only the plug, not the cable for the power supply
to the socket (3)!
The cable must be connected by trained specialist personnel.
Warning
Maintenance and repair work must be carried out by trained specialist
personnel.

6 - 70 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Additional displays (special equipment)

6.4.7 External loudspeaker system


Note
The machine is equipped with an external loudspeaker system (1).
Use switch (2) to switch the microphone (3) on.
There is no intercom system.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 71


Operation - Application

6.5 Application

6.5.1 Safety instructions


DANGER
 Read Chapter 1 SICHERHEIT.
Before start-up, carry out checks according to
Section5.4 .
 Persons working on or with the machine must be trained or
instructed for that purpose.
Operation and deployment may only be carried out by
suitably trained personnel.
 Proceed with utmost caution if you override the jib end limit.
 Ensure that there is no one in the danger zone.
 Maintain safety distance to overhead lines.
 Only operate the machine from the driver's seat.
 Do not transport persons on the machine.
 Consider environment conditions, e.g. poor visibility, wind speeds,
etc.
 Use the specific lifting capacity table for that machine.
 Note performance specification.
 Check that anchorage points have a sufficient safe working load.
 Observe guide signals as necessary.
 Never allow the machine to roll with the ignition switched off. When
the engine is not running, there is no power-assisted steering.
 Position boom in direction of travel during long journeys.
 Before leaving the driver's cab:
– Position the machine on firm base, if necessary set back from the
edge of the excavation
– Lower suspended loads
– Secure working equipment
– Pull safety lever back
– Chock wheels/running gear
– Switch off engine
– Lock cab, show warning lights if necessary.
– Lock the floating axle.

6 - 72 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

6.5.2 Maneuvering cab


Safety instructions
DANGER
Danger of accident when cab is tilted!
Cab mounting, check bolts and screw fastenings daily!
 Move the machine only with the cab lowered and retracted and the
slewing gear holding brake engaged.
 Exit the cab only when it is in the completely lowered and retracted
position.
 Maneuver the cab only when the undercarriage supports are
deployed!
 Keep the driver's doors closed
 Fasten restraint belt (optional) in accordance with Section5.7.2.
 Maneuvering the cab is prohibited when individuals and/or objects
are on the gallery (platform).

DANGER
Danger to life through shearing and crushing forces!
Make sure that there is no one within the danger area of the suspended
cab. The danger area is the area
 on and under the cab,
 on/under the mechanical cab supporting structure.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 73


Operation - Application

Maneuvering cab

3*

4*

*: Optional model / special function

Cab 1 Press safety lever (see Section6.3.4) forwards.


elevating/lowering
2 Switch the machine on as described in Section5.7.
3 Press rocker switch (1).
The cab is raised (Cab up).
4 Press rocker switch (2).
The cab is lowered (Cab down).

Note
Do not elevate the cab to the uppermost/furthest forward limit setting
(OT).
Stop the cab approx. 10 cm before the uppermost/foremost limit. This
provides optimum damping characteristics and pleasant working
conditions in the cab.

6 - 74 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

Cab 1 Press safety lever (see Section6.3.4) forwards.


extend/retract (optional)
2 Switch the machine on as described in Section5.7.
3 Press rocker switch (3*).
The cab is extended (Cab out).
4 Press rocker switch (4*).
The cab is retracted (Cab in).

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 75


Operation - Application

6.5.3 Emergency lowering - cab


Note
The emergency lowering feature still functions in the event of engine or
hydraulic system failure. The machine is equipped with the ability to
lower the cab in an emergency from the following two locations:
 Emergency lowering (in the cab)
Location: To the right of the right-hand control lever. This is the
same button that is used for "Cab down".
Necessary e.g. in event of a fault in drive system.
 Emergency lowering (outside the cab)
Location: Under the front left-hand service door.
Necessary for situations in which the machine driver has a health
complaint which places him/her in a hazardous situation.
DANGER
Danger to life through shearing and crushing forces!
Make sure that there is no one within the danger area of the suspended
cab. The danger area is the area
 on and under the cab,
 on/under the mechanical cab supporting structure.

Emergency lowering-
in the cab

1 Press rocker switch (2).


– The cab lowers slowly.

DANGER
The lowering movement is ended if the button is released.
This function is no longer possible with battery isolator switch "off".

6 - 76 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

Emergency lowering-
outside the cab

shown =
cab elevated

1 Press lever (2) upwards. The cab lowers slowly.


2 Pull lever (2) back again after reaching the lower limit position.

Note
The emergency lowering lever is located under the front left-hand
service doors.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 77


Operation - Application

6.5.4 Driving machine - Mobile


DANGER
Risk of accident through incorrect use!
If the boom is positioned above the rear axle, the driving actions of the
machine are reversed. Proceed with extreme caution whenever you
wish to work or maneuver over the rear axle.
Driving with Please note the following points when driving with a suspended load:
suspended load
 Danger of tipping!
Keep loads as close as possible to the ground when moving.
 Always position jib lengthwise to undercarriage.
 Only carry 50% of the permitted safe working load.
 Only drive on even ground with sufficient load-bearing capacity.
 Reduce pendulum movements of load by sensitive driving.
 Negotiate corners with as wide a radius as possible.

DANGER
Risk of accident through incorrect use!
If the boom is positioned above the rear axle, the driving actions of the
machine are reversed. Proceed with extreme caution whenever you
wish to work or maneuver over the rear axle.

Note
A red indicator arrow (1) is located at the front of the undercarriage.
This can be seen through the right-hand cab window. It indicates that
the boom is over the front axle.

6 - 78 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

Driving 1 Actuate and lock the service brake (1).


2 Start engine (2).
3 Push safety lever (3) forward.
4 Retract stabilizers (4) if necessary.

Note
Further information on steering can be found in Section6.3.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 79


Operation - Application

5 Select off-road or on-road operation (5).


6 Release the floating axle (6) if necessary.

7
8
9

10

7 Actuate the release lever (7) for the service brake (8).
8 Select the direction of travel by actuating the accelerator pedal
(9).
9 Slow the machine via the service brake (8).
10 Switch off machine according to Section5.8.
11 Always apply the service brake (8) when leaving!
12 Pull back the safety lever (10).

Note
Avoid excessive heating of the hydraulic oil. Do not hold the steering at
full lock longer than necessary.

6 - 80 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

6.5.5 Stabilizing machine - Mobile


The machine is stabilized on an uneven surface by using the support
legs. This increases the standing stability. Load capacities see
Section3.2.

CAUTION
Position stabilizers on a firm, even base.
Do not raise machine using the stabilisers. The tires must remain in
contact with the ground.

CAUTION
Never extend the stabilizers completely (= to the stop). The weight will
not be distributed evenly over the individual stabilizers this way, i.e. the
maximum standing safety is not guaranteed.
If you extended the supports completely (audible sound), retract them
slightly!

correct

incorrect

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 81


Operation - Application

Actuation of all supports:


1 Outrigger lever
a ahead = extend
b back = retract

Extending full 1 Applying the parking and service brakes.


stabilizers
2 Start engine acc. to Section5.7.3.
3 Loosen the safety lever (see Section6.3.4).
4 Lock the floating axle with the switch on the front right of the
control panel (lamp in switch does not light up).
5 Push the lever for actuating all supports (1) forwards until the
supports are extended completely. Then pull the lever back
until the wheels are in contact with the ground.

DANGER
Observe reduced lifting capacities for a machine that is not stabilized!

Extend single stabilizer


(optional) 1 Applying the parking and service brakes.
2 Start engine acc. to Section5.7.3.

6 - 82 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

3 4

2 5

Actuation of all Single actuation for stabilizers:


supports:
2 rear left
1 Outrigger lever
3 front left
a ahead = extend
4 front right
b back = retract
5 rear right

3 Loosen the safety lever (see Section6.3.4).


4 Lock the floating axle with the switch on the front right of the
control panel (lamp in switch does not light up).
5 On uneven ground, make sure to level the machine by using
the individual stabilizers.
E.g.: Extend the front left outrigger:
– Press button (3) (and hold pressed) and simultaneously
press the lever (1) ahead.
– Proceed in the same way for the other three outriggers.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 83


Operation - Application

Retracting outrigger 1 Applying the parking and service brakes.


2 Start engine acc. to Section5.7.3.
3 Loosen the safety lever (see Section6.3.4).
4 Pull the lever for actuating all supports (1) back.
5 Check that all four supports are retracted completely.

Actuation of all supports:


1 Outrigger lever
b back = retract

Attention
To enable the supports to retract in a uniform manner, lever (1) must
be briefly pulled back once until the stop. The retraction speed can then
be selected as required.

6 - 84 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

6.5.6 Driving machine - Crawler


DANGER
Risk of accident through incorrect use!
If the boom is positioned above the rear axle, the driving actions of the
machine are reversed. Proceed with extreme caution whenever you
wish to work or maneuver over the rear axle.
Driving with suspended Please note the following points when driving with a suspended load:
load
 Danger of tipping!
Keep loads as close as possible to the ground when moving.
 Always position jib lengthwise to undercarriage.
 Only carry 50% of the permitted safe working load.
 Only drive on even ground with sufficient load-bearing capacity.
 Lock the floating axle.
 Reduce pendulum movements of load by sensitive driving.
 Negotiate corners with as wide a radius as possible.

Stop machine

Setting Travel gear movement:


driving pedal/manual lever:

release driving pedal/hand lever:


The driving pedals/hand levers automatically return to the middle
setting (neutral).

Forwards – travel in a straight line


Setting Travel gear movement:
driving pedal/manual lever:

Push both driving pedals/hand levers forwards.


Reverse – travel in a straight line

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 85


Operation - Application

Setting Travel gear movement:


driving pedal/manual lever:

Pull both driving pedals/hand levers backwards.

Forwards – travel to the left


Setting Travel gear movement:
driving pedal/manual lever:

Leave left-hand driving pedal/hand lever in the middle setting (neutral).


Push right-hand driving pedals/hand lever forwards.

Forwards – travel to the right


Setting Travel gear movement:
driving pedal/manual lever:

Push left-hand driving pedal/hand lever forwards.


Leave right-hand driving pedal/hand lever in the middle setting
(neutral).

Reverse – travel to the left


Setting Travel gear movement:
driving pedal/manual lever:

Leave left-hand driving pedal/hand lever in the middle setting (neutral).


Pull right-hand driving pedals/hand lever backwards.

6 - 86 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

Reverse – travel to the right


Setting Travel gear movement:
driving pedal/manual lever:

Push left-hand driving pedal/hand lever backwards.


Leave right-hand driving pedal/hand lever in the middle setting
(neutral).

Slew left – at a standstill


Setting Travel gear movement:
driving pedal/manual lever:

Push left-hand driving pedal/hand lever backwards.


Push right-hand driving pedals/hand lever forwards.

Slew right – at a standstill


Setting Travel gear movement:
driving pedal/manual lever:

Push left-hand driving pedal/hand lever forwards.


Pull right-hand driving pedals/hand lever backwards.

Note
Further information on steering can be found in Section6.3.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 87


Operation - Application

6.5.7 Changing the crawler track width (hydraulic - optional)


General You can alter the track width of the machine:
 When deployed and during maintenance and servicing, always
extend the running gear to the maximum track width and secure.
 The undercarriage track width can be reduced in order to transport
the machine on a flatbed trailer. If necessary, remove extension
pieces.

Safety instructions Observe the safety guidelines before starting to telescope the running
gear.
DANGER
 Accident risk through tipping of machine!
Never slew the upper structure when the undercarriage is retracted
and the operating equipment has been removed.

 Before telescoping, position the upper structure parallel to the


running gear and apply the swing bearing brake to prevent twisting.
 Do not rotate the upper structure during the telescoping procedure.
 The machine is ready to operate after the running gear has been
extended, pinned and secured. Hydraulic cylinders offer no degree
of security. The undercarriage may move in the event of leaks or
seal failures.

6 - 88 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

Extending the running


gear

1 1

1 The 4 locking bolts (1) on the telescoping gear for the


undercarriage are to be unlocked and removed.

2 Enable telescoping with switch (2).


3 Use switch (3) to extend the undercarriage.

4 Insert the 4 locking bolts (1) again and secure.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 89


Operation - Application

Retracting the running


gear

1 Unlock the 4 locking bolts (1) on the extension gear for the
telescope of the undercarriage and remove.

2 Enable telescoping with switch (2).


3 Use switch (3) to retract the undercarriage.

1 1

4 Insert the 4 locking bolts (1) again and secure.

DANGER
Accident risk through tipping of machine!
The machine is not operational with retracted undercarriage.

6 - 90 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

6.5.8 Changing crawler track width (mechanical)


General You can alter the track width of the machine:
 When deployed and during maintenance and servicing, always
extend the running gear to the maximum track width and secure.
 The undercarriage track width can be reduced in order to transport
the machine on a flatbed trailer. If necessary, remove extension
pieces.

Safety instructions Observe the safety guidelines before starting to telescope the running
gear.
DANGER
 Accident risk through tipping of machine!
Never slew the upper structure when the undercarriage is retracted
and the operating equipment has been removed.

 Before telescoping, position the upper structure parallel to the


running gear and apply the swing bearing brake to prevent twisting.
 Do not rotate the upper structure during the telescoping procedure.
 The machine is ready to operate after the running gear has been
extended, pinned and secured. Hydraulic cylinders offer no degree
of security. The undercarriage may move in the event of leaks or
seal failures.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 91


Operation - Application

Extending running gear

1 1

1 The 4 locking bolts (1) on the telescoping gear for the


undercarriage are to be unlocked and removed.

2 Fasten a sufficiently rated suspension gear (2) on the track


wheel carrier.
3 Pull the track wheel carrier out to the stop with a suitable
towing machine.

4 Insert the 4 locking bolts (1) again and secure.

6 - 92 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

Retracting the running


gear

1 Unlock the 4 locking bolts (1) on the extension gear for the
telescope of the undercarriage and remove.
2 Push the track wheel carrier together.

1 1

3 Insert the 4 locking bolts (1) again and secure.

DANGER
Accident risk through tipping of machine!
The machine is not operational with retracted undercarriage.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 93


Operation - Application

6.5.9 Superstructure rotation/braking


The upper structure is slewed using the left-hand control lever.
DANGER
There is a danger of tipping with additional counterweight in which
case, the machine must be stabilized when slewing the superstructure!

WARNING
Never rotate the upper structure when the slewing gear holding brake
is applied!

2*

Joystick steering version

1 c

Left control lever

1 Slewing gear holding brake switch


2* Slewing gear holding brake pedal (optional)
Motions of left control lever:
c Slew upper structure, left
d Slew upper structure, right

*: Optional model / special function

6 - 94 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

Note
In order to rotate the superstructure, the ignition must be switched on,
the safety lever must be released (pressed ahead) and the slewing
gear holding brake switch "right" must be pressed.
If only one of these criteria is not met, rotation is impossible.

Slewing speed The slewing speed is dependent on the:


 speed of the driving engine
 Distance the left control lever is moved.
DANGER
No persons, buildings or machines may be within the slewing range of
the upper structure (danger area).

Rotation 1 Place the left control lever in the neutral position (0-position).
stop The upper structure is hydraulically braked. The slewing
(braking) maneuver gradually stops. Note: Moving the control lever in
the opposite direction intensifies the braking action.
OR optional:
Actuate the slewing gear holding brake pedal (2). The upper
structure is braked hydro-dynamically.

DANGER
Danger of tipping
If the upper structure is turned when the machine is unstabilized, the
compact boom may only be raised to a maximum of 45 degrees.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 95


Operation - Application

Slewing gear holding the slewing gear holding brake is not an operational brake for braking
brake the superstructure. The slewing gear holding brake serves exclusively
as a parking and holding brake when the superstructure is at rest.
The superstructure must have stopped rotating completely before the
slewing gear holding brake is applied.
WARNING
If the slewing gear holding brake is used to stop the upper structure,
serious damage will be caused to the brake and/or the slewing gear.
This damage can be of the following nature:
 Diminished braking effect due to clutch plate damage
 Irreparable damage to the brake or other components
 Irreparable damage to the slewing gear
This damage is excluded from the terms of warranty issued by
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH
The operator of the machine alone is liable for such damage as well as
any consequential damage - for instance, that resulting from reduced
braking action!

Note
The slewing gear holding brake is applied automatically as soon as
 the safety lever is pulled back or
 the engine is switched off (e.g. emergency shut-down, key switch).
In adverse conditions it may take 30 seconds before the full braking
effect is applied.
Activate slewing gear Move switch (1) to the "left" on right-hand control panel.
holding brake The slewing gear holding brake is activated, the indicator lamp in the
switch is not illuminated. The red indicator symbol also illuminates in
the SDS.

Deactivate/release the Move switch (1) to the "right" on right-hand control panel.
slewing gear holding The slewing gear holding brake is released. The green LED is
brake illuminated in the switch and the red indicator lamp in the SDS goes out.

6 - 96 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

6.5.10 Lifting /lowering loads


Heed the following safety instructions:
DANGER
 A suspended load is an accident risk!
Always lower the load when work is interrupted.
Never leave the driver's cab when a load is suspended.
 Activate the overload warning device
 Do not carry out any form of work which will reduce the stability of
the machine!
 Attachments (e.g. grab) and load elements can swing. Proceed with
extreme caution.
 Observe danger area.
The load is hoisted/lowered using theleft-hand and/or the right-hand
control lever.
A a

B b

Control lever, left-hand Control lever, right-hand


Movement directions: Movement directions
A Lift load (Jib out) a Lower load (hoist down)
B Lower load (Jib in) b Lift load (hoist up)

Arm speed The arm speed depends on the:


 speed of the driving engine
 Distance the left control lever is moved.
 Load on end of jib
Lift speed The lift speed depends on the:
 speed of the driving engine
 inclination of the right control lever.
 Load on end of jib

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 97


Operation - Application

6.5.11 End limit cut-out equipment


The end limit cut-out switch prevents the hydraulic cylinders from
striking against the end stop.
DANGER
Under no circumstances should the settings for limit cut-out made in
the factory (3) be changed!
This setting may only be adjusted by SENNEBOGEN Customer
Service or an authorized SENNEBOGEN service partner!
The following damage can occur, if the operator adjusts the end limit
cut-out on his own:
 Wear in the cylinder mounting bearings and boom.
 Damage to the hydraulic cylinder.
 Increased machine wear.
This damage is excluded from the terms of warranty issued by
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH
The operator of the machine alone is liable for such damage as well as
any consequential damage!

Safety limit position The safety limit cut out “Retract jib” is set at the factory as follows:
sensor for "Arm in"
 Arm in: Arm (without attachment) approx. 2.5 m in front of lowered
cab

1 2 3

2,5m

1 Compact boom 3 Grabbing jib


2 Sensor element

6 - 98 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

DANGER
Danger to life if the safety limit position sensor for "Arm in" is set
incorrectly!

Attachments or parts of the load can strike and penetrate the cab.
Always adjust the basic factory setting to take into account any
attachment (e.g. grab). The operator alone is responsible for operation
of the machine with an incorrectly set safety limit position sensor for
"Arm in"!

Additional limitations With the optional additional limitations, you can limit the "Jib out" or
"Hoist up". This is useful
 near power lines (see Section1.9)
 in buildings with limited headroom
 under bridges
 when working with attachments not supplied by SENNEBOGEN.

Note
The following safety end limit cut-outs can be used optionally:
 "Jib out"
 "Boom up" (Hoist up)
 "Boom down" (Hoist down)

Note
The optional additional limit cut-outs cannot be bypassed.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 99


Operation - Application

Auxiliary limiting
- Hoist

1 Additional limitation "Hoist down"


(Optional)
2 Limit cut out – hoist down
3 Additional limitation "Hoist up"
(Optional)
4 Limit cut out – Hoist up
1 2 3 4
DANGER
Under no circumstances should the setting for limit shutdown made in
the factory (2, 4) be changed!
This setting may only be adjusted by SENNEBOGEN Customer
Service or an authorized SENNEBOGEN service partner!

With additional limitation installation - Set hoist as follows:

1 Raise the compact boom carefully to just below the maximum


height/depth limit (maintain safety distance!).
2 Loosen the hexagon nuts for the additional limits (1) or (3).
3 Additional limits (1) or (3) are to be moved until the sensors are
triggered (LED on sensor goes out).
4 Tighten the hexagon nuts for the additional limits (1) or (3).
5 Switch the rocker switch Additional limitation on at the control
panel.
6 Check setting and repeat if necessary.

Note
The optional additional limit cut-outs (1, 3) cannot be bypassed.

6 - 100 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

Auxiliary limiting
- Jib out

5 6
5 Additional limit "Jib out" (optional)
6 Lift limit "Jib out" (optional)

DANGER
Under no circumstances should the setting for limit shutdown made in
the factory (6) be changed!
This setting may only be adjusted by SENNEBOGEN Customer
Service or an authorized SENNEBOGEN service partner!

With additional limitation installation - Set jib as follows:

1 Raise the jib carefully to just below the maximum height limit
(maintain safety distance!).
2 Loosen the hexagon nuts for the additional limits (5).
3 Adjust additional limits (5) until sensors responds (LED on
sensor goes out).
4 Tighten the hexagon nuts for the additional limits (5).
5 Switch the rocker switch Additional limitation on at the control
panel.
6 Check setting and repeat if necessary.

Note
The optional additional limit (5) cannot be bypassed.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 101


Operation - Application

6.5.12 Bypassing the safety limit position sensor for "Arm


in"
In exceptional circumstances it may be necessary to move beyond the
safety end limit (bypass safety end limit cut-out).

Note
The optional additional limit cut-outs cannot be bypassed.

1 Pushbutton
2 Control lever, left-hand

DANGER
Danger to life through overriding safety end limit cut-out!

1 Press and hold pushbutton (1) on the left control lever.


2 Move the control lever in the respective direction with extra
care depending on the work function (Jib in/out, Hoist up/
down). See also Section6.3.5 and Section6.3.6.

6 - 102 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

6.5.13 Working with the grab


Heed the following safety instructions:
WARNING
 A suspended load is an accident risk!
Always lower the load when work is interrupted.
Never leave the driver's cab when a load is suspended.
 Activate the overload warning device.
 Do not carry out any form of work which will reduce the stability of
the machine!
 Attachments (e.g. grab) and load elements can swing. Proceed with
extreme caution.
 Observe danger area.

The grab is opened/closed using the right control lever, and rotated
using the two front pushbuttons on the left control lever.

1
2
c

Grab motions Movement directions:


1 Rotate counterclockwise c Close grab
2 Rotate clockwise d Open grab

1,2

c, d

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 103


Operation - Application

6.5.14 Operation with generator and magnet system (special


function)
Heed the following safety instructions:
DANGER
 Risk of fatality!
A suspended load is an accident risk!
If the magnet system fails, the load will fall.
Always lower the load when work is interrupted.
Never leave the driver's cab when a load is suspended.
 Activate the overload warning device and check that it is operating
properly.
 Ensure that the Automatic idle is deactivated.
 During operation, dangerous voltages can occur.
 Parts of the generator can become very hot even after operation.
 Inserting or removing plugged connections during operation is not
permitted.
 Installation/start-up as well as maintenance and service work on the
magnet system are to be performed only by authorized and qualified
technicians.
 Before using the magnet system, read the manual.
 Use permitted accessories only. For more information, please
contact SENNEBOGEN customer service.
 Operation is only allowed with magnet plates: other applications are
not permitted.
 Observe operating data.
 Cleaning with a high-pressure washer (steam cleaner) is not
allowed.
 The openings for the condensation vent must be at the lowest point.
 Observe further safety guidelines.
 No changes may be made to the generator (e.g. location, drive
type).

Note
Deactivate the ECO switch when working with the Magnet unit (see
Section6.3.15)!

6 - 104 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

Operation

1 Start engine acc. to Section5.7.3.


2 Set the speed (rpm) selector (1) on the right rear control panel
to maximum.
3 Set the magnet according to the load material.

WARNING
Ensure that the permitted load limits are not exceeded.

3
2

4 Switching on the magnetic equipment:


– Actuate the switch on the upper right control panel.
– Press the front pushbutton (2) on the right control lever.
5 Dropping the load:
– Press pushbutton (2) or *(3).
* Customer-specific switch allocation!
6 Switching off the magnetic equipment.
– Actuate the switch on the control panel:

CAUTION
If the magnet system is not switched off after use, the entire system
(generator and magnet plate) can overheat.
Note

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 105


Operation - Application

The automatic idle function remains deactivated as long as the


magnetic equipment is on.

Note
Further information on the control unit (MMI) (4) can be found in
Chapter 10.

6 - 106 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Application

6.5.15 Working with scrap shears (special function)


Heed the following safety instructions:
WARNING
 A suspended load is an accident risk!
Always lower the load when work is interrupted.
Never leave the driver's cab when a load is suspended.
 Activate the overload warning device.
 Do not carry out any form of work which will reduce the stability of
the machine!
 Attachments (e.g. scrap metal shears) and load elements can
swing. Proceed with extreme caution.
 Observe danger area.

CAUTION
Select the correct operating mode in SENNEBOGEN Tool Control (see
Section6.4.1).

The scrap shears are opened/closed using the right control lever, and
rotated using the two front pushbuttons on the left control lever.

1
2
c

Scrap shear motions: :


Movement directions
1 Rotate counterclockwise c Close scrap shears
2 Rotate clockwise d Open scrap shears

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 107


Operation - Application

6.5.16 Working with a hydraulic hammer (special function)


Note
The hydraulic hammer is tipped with the left pedal.

1 2
CAUTION
Select the correct operating mode in SENNEBOGEN Tool Control (see
Section6.4.1).

1 Press button (2) and hold pressed to activate the hydraulic


hammer.
2 Push pedal (1) forward. The turning cylinder is retracted, the
hydraulic hammer tips upward
3 Push pedal (1) back. The turning cylinder is extended, the
hydraulic hammer tips downward

Note
Preselecting function floating position (see Section6.3.15). The full
weight of the boom affects the hammer.

6 - 108 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Vario Tool (Option)

6.6 Vario Tool (Option)

 Only work with the quick-charger after you have read and complete-
ly understood this manual.
 Refrain from operating or maintaining the machine in an unsafe
manner.
 Do not place the quick-changer in operation if defects are detected.
 The quick-changer must be set up, operated, and maintained by
trained personnel only. The owner is responsible for the qualifica-
tions and training of personnel.
 This manual is a component of the quick-changer. Keep the manual
in the cab at all times. Recommended storage location: Storage
compartment behind the driver seat.
 In the event of sale, disposal or loan, the manual must be provided.
 Contact SENNEBOGEN immediately if there is anything in the man-
ual that you do not understand!
Your comments will help us to make the manual even more user-
friendly.
 For reasons of clarity, the specified protective devices are not shown
in some of the illustrations.
Operation with protective devices removed is not permitted!

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 109


Operation - Foreseeable misuse

WARNING
Dangers due to non-intended use
All information in this operating manual must be strictly complied with!
The following uses are not intended thus are prohibited:
 Transport of persons
 Using the quick-changer as striking tool, ramming tool, and/or lever
tool
 Lifting or transport tasks of objects with ropes, straps, or chains on
the quick-changer
 Ensure that no one is in the danger zone!
 Technical changes on the product
 The load lift chart of the machine must be complied with!

6.7 Foreseeable misuse


 Overload of the quick-changer due to operation on non-intended
(too heavy) carrier devices and/or tools and interchangeable equip-
ment
 Do not use hooks of the bolt receptacle on the quick-changer as load
hooks!
 Do not lever or tear with the receptacle hooks!
 Do not push or pull objects!
 Do not use as a hammer tool or impact tool!

6.8 Organizational safety measures


 At regular intervals, instruct and train operating personnel concern-
ing safety-conscious work with the quick-changer!
 Do not execute any changes, attachments or conversions on the
product without permission of the manufacturer/supplier.
 In the case of accident, comply with the general first aid rules.
 Always keep escape routes or removal routes free!
 The owner must ensure that all safety devices are fully functional
and are tested on a regular basis.
 Regularly review and comply with maintenance and inspection inter-
vals!

6 - 110 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Safety instructions for the hydraulic system/electrical system

6.9 Safety instructions for the hydraulic system/


electrical system
Only specialized personnel who have been authorized and trained by
SENNEBOGEN are permitted to perform tasks on the hydraulic
system and electrical system of the quick-changer.

 Shut down the material handling machine and safeguard it against


being switched on again, activate the battery disconnect switch!
 Completely depressurize the hydraulic system!
 Regularly check all lines, hoses, and threaded unions for leaks and
apparent damage.
 Damage detected must be rectified immediately!
 Properly layout and mount hydraulic lines and electrical lines, do not
swap out connections!
 Protective plates and other protective fixtures on the quick-changer
must only be dismounted for maintenance purposes!
 Operation with dismounted protective devices is prohibited!
WARNING – life-threatening danger!
Prior to performing maintenance tasks on energized components,
ensure de-energized status, and ensure de-energized status for the
duration of the tasks, through suitable measures!

6.10Safety instructions in operation


 After each locking process, and prior to using the quick-change sys-
tem, check for faultless locking through a safety test.
 Only use the quick-changer in safe and faultless condition.
 Refrain from non-intended use and use that is questionable in terms
of safety!
 The presence of persons in the danger zone of the machine and of
the attachment is prohibited! Exceptions are possible, if unavoidable
for operational reasons, and the owner has defined adequate pro-
tective measures on the basis of a concrete hazard assessment in
the specific case.
 The machine operator must issue recognizable warning signals if
persons are in danger.
 Check the quick-changer and the tool adapters daily for apparent
damage or defects prior to start up.
 If changes are detected, immediately stop operation and report the
changes to the safety officer or your supervisor.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 111


Operation - Safety instructions – assembly / maintenance / repair

6.11 Safety instructions – assembly /


maintenance / repair
Maintenance and assembly tasks, particularly on the hydraulic system
must only be executed by specialists who have been authorized and
trained by SENNEBOGEN, who

 have completed professional training in the respective technical ar-


ea,
 work autonomously and prudently,
 have the necessary experience, and
 recognize and avoid dangers in good time.

When handling lubricants, operating fluids, and other chemical


substances, the safety data sheets and environmental protection
directives that apply for the product must be complied with.

WARNING – life-threatening danger!


Through inadequate technical skills or training, severe injury and
material damage can occur. It must be ensured that for operating and
maintenance personnel, a distinction is made between

 instructed personnel (minor maintenance and cleaning tasks) and


 specialist (hydraulic system, electrical system, mechanical sys-
tems).
Autonomous work with and on the quick-changer must only be
executed by persons who

 are physically and mentally suitable in this regard,


 have received instruction in the general accident prevention and oc-
cupational health and safety regulations,
 have been instructed in the handling of the quick-changer,
 have completely read and understood the entire operating manual.
 Ensure that only personnel who have been assigned to do so work
with the quick-changer.
 Only conduct instruction courses with expert personnel who have
been commissioned, and authorized in this regard.

6 - 112 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Product description

6.12 Product description


When the quick-changer locks, the components of the Vario Tool
quick-change system, the hydraulic system, or the electrical system of
the material handling machine connect to the hydraulic system or
electrical system of the attachment, and thus form a safe, closed
circuit.

The machine-side valve block is referred to as S-block.

The tool-side valve block is referred to as A-block.

6.13Safety test
Prior to starting work

1 Unlock quick-changer.
2 Buzzer sounds, when the locking wedge retracts.
3 Locking wedge must completely retract and must not jam.
4 Lock quick-changer.
5 Buzzer stops sounding, when the locking wedge extends.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 113


Operation - Changing equipment

 If there are conspicuous irregularities, break off the work procedure,


and report or rectify faults!

6.14Changing equipment
The machine can be optionally equipped with a stick for grapple
operation, scrap metal shears, a stick with reversing inserts (ULM) and
other attachments released by SENNEBOGEN.
The rubber mounted coupling element is on the attachment tool side,
the rigid non-rubber mounted coupling element is mounted on the tool
adapter.
Note
Operation of the grapple and the scrap metal shears is described in
??? and ???.
Note
To avoid contamination of the coupling units and to facilitate the
coupling and uncoupling procedure, a storage compartment for the
tools should be used.
You can also enquire in this regard at the SENNEBOGEN Customer
Service Organization (see the Fig. below).

DANGER
Attachment tool can fall if not operated properly!
With coupled attachment tool and locked Vario Tool the hydraulic
locking mechanism is charged with pressure.

6 - 114 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Changing equipment

The quick-changer has been developed for demanding tasks. Persons


working on or with the quick-changer must be trained or instructed for
this purpose.

Operation and work implementation must only be carried out by


trained personnel. Only specialized personnel who have been
authorized and trained by SENNEBOGEN are allowed to perform
repair, maintenance and measurement tasks.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 115


Operation - Changing equipment

6.14.1 Operation – coupling


Note
Prior to starting the coupling procedure, the operator must ensure for
himself that the coupling devices are in proper condition.
Clutch, guides, bolts, and hooks on the stick base and on the tool
adapter must be cleaned carefully with a cloth (if necessary use a
cleaning spray)
Danger – severe crushing!

 Ensure that no one is in the danger zone of the machine!


 Do not stand underneath a suspended load!

1. Unlock quick-changer
a. Unlock rocker switch

b. Push rocker switch to the right

c. Buzzer sounds.

Locking wedge retracts.


2. Position quick-changer on the attachment (see Fig.)

3. Take up the top adapter bolt with the receptacle jaws.

6 - 116 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Changing equipment

4. Lift up tool adapter until attachment is off the ground.

5. Lock quick-changer.
a. Unlock rocker switch

b. Push rocker switch to the left

c. Buzzer stops sounding

Locking wedge extends.

6. Function test, attachment must work as intended.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 117


Operation - Changing equipment

6.14.2 Operation – uncoupling


1. Unlock quick-changer
a. Unlock rocker switch

b. Push rocker switch to the right

c. Buzzer sounds.

Locking wedge retracts.

2. Set the attachment tool on the ground.

3. Set down the tool adapter.

6 - 118 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Changing equipment

4. With the receptacle jaws, unhook the top adapter bolt.

5. Lock quick-changer.
a. Unlock rocker switch

b. Push rocker switch to the left

c. Buzzer stops sounding

Locking wedge extends.


WARNING – danger of the tool adapter tipping and slipping
The placement surface for setting down the tool adapter should be
solid and level (for example concrete or asphalt surface). This ensures
the stability of the tool adapter and reduces the danger of
contamination.

Tool adapters that are set down for a longer period of time must be se-
cured against tipping over and/or slipping off with suitable measures!

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 119


Operation - Rectifying faults

6.14.3 Operation - proper set down of the tool adapters

WARNING – danger of the tool adapter tipping and slipping


The placement surface for setting down the tool adapter should be
solid and level (for example concrete or asphalt surface). This ensures
the stability of the tool adapter and reduces the danger of
contamination.

Tool adapters that are set down for a longer period of time must be
secured against tipping over and/or slipping off with suitable
measures!

6.15Rectifying faults
WARNING – penetration of pressurized media, abrasion and
cutting wounds, minor burns

 Pressurized media – wear protective goggles when the hydraulic


system is active!
 Danger of burning – hot surfaces!
 Abrasion wounds – sharp corners and edges, wear gloves and hard
hat!
 Wear hearing protection when the engine is running

6 - 120 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Rectifying faults

Fault Possible cause Measure / solution


Leaks during  Hydraulic hoses, lines or connec-  Shut down the machine and safeguard it
operation tions leak against being switched on again!
 S-block, O-rings on the valves  De-pressurize hydraulic system!
are defective  Perform a visual inspection for leaks, if nec-
 A-block, O-rings on the valves essary replace defective O-rings.
are defective  If there are leaks on the hydraulic system,
contact SENNEBOGEN Customer Service.
Leaks on the  Valve tappet contaminated  Remove and clean valves.
quick-changer (S-  Valve seat damaged  Replace damaged valve.
block)
 Valve tappet damaged  Inspect and replace defective O-rings.
 O-ring defective

Leaks on the  Valve tappet contaminated  Remove and clean valves.


quick-changer (A-  Valve seat damaged  Replace damaged valve.
block)
 Valve tappet damaged  Inspect and replace defective O-rings.
 O-ring defective

Quick-changer  Machine is shut down  Start machine.


does not lock  Red safety lever not in work posi-  Place safety lever in work position.
tion  Check hydraulic lines, replace if necessary.
 Hydraulic hoses, lines or connec-
 Check electrical system, contact SENNE-
tions are defective BOGEN Customer Service if necessary.
 Quick-change valve has no oper-
ating voltage

Quick-changer  Machine is shut down  Start machine.


does not unlock  Red safety lever not in work posi-  Place safety lever in work position.
tion  Shut down magnet system before unlock-
 Magnet system switched on ing.
 Hydraulic hoses, lines or connec-  Check hydraulic lines, replace if necessary.
tions are defective  Check electrical system, contact SENNE-
 Quick-change valve has no oper- BOGEN Customer Service if necessary.
ating voltage

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 121


Operation - Rectifying faults

Fault Possible cause Measure / solution


Buzzer does not  Distance sensor on the locking  Readjust distance sensor.
sound when un- wedge has shifted  Replace distance sensor.
locking  Distance sensor is defective
 Replace buzzer.
 Buzzer is defective
 Contact SENNEBOGEN Customer Service
if necessary.

6 - 122 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Refueling machine

6.16 Refueling machine


The machine can be refueled in two ways:
 Manually
 using a refueling pump

DANGER
 Fuel is damaging to health and easily inflammable.
Smoking and working near an open flame is strictly forbidden.
 Position the machine on a firm, even surface.
 Only refuel when engine is shut down!
 Fuel must not ingress ground or waterways.
Always ensure that fuel does not overflow when refueling.
 Before filling, the fluid level in the tank must be determined - the
amount of fuel that the tank can taken on.
 When refuelling from a tank-truck or trailer, the following applies:
Filling speed of max. 200 l/min. (52 U.S.GPM) , since otherwise the
fuel will overflow.
 The filling procedure must be monitored at all times - no matter how
the filling is done.

Note
Observe the notes in the operating instructions of the engine
manufacturer.

Manually 1 Lower suspended loads and jib to the ground.


2 Shut down engine.

2
4 3

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 123


Operation - Refueling machine

3 Open left rear maintenance panel.


4 Open cap (1) of filler strainer.
5 Clean strainer.
6 Insert funnel in filler strainer.
7 Carefully pour in fuel through the funnel.
8 Replace cap (1) and close side panel.

using a refueling pump 1 Lower suspended loads and jib to the ground.
2 Shut down engine.
3 Place the key switch in the "P" position.
4 Open left rear maintenance panel.
5 Open cap (1) of filler strainer.
This will allow air to escape from the fuel tank.

DANGER
If the cap is not open, excess pressure can build up in the tank while it
is being filled. The tank can become deformed or can burst and
potentially cause damage to property or injure personnel. Spilled fuel
also causes environmental damage.

6 Insert refueling hose (4) in the external fuel container.

Note
Danger of cavitation!
Ensure that the maximum suction height of 3 m (3.28 ft) is not
exceeded.

7 Switch on refueling pump with the green button (2).


The tank is automatically filled.

CAUTION
Ensure that the pump does not run dry (> 30 s).
Switch off refueling pump with the red button (3) if necessary to prevent
damage.

6 - 124 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Refueling machine

8 Monitor fuel level via the inspection glass on the fuel tank.
Switch the pump off with the red button (3) as soon as the tank
is full.
9 Remove the fueling hose (4) from the external fuel container
and stow.
10 Re-close cover (1) of filler strainer.
11 Close service access door again.

Note
Check the following points if the refueling pump does not start after
approx. 5 seconds:

1 Is the battery charged?


2 Are all fuses in order?
3 Is the suction side free of leaks?
4 Is the maximum suction height 3 m or less?

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 125


Operation - Actions to take if the electronics fail

6.17 Actions to take if the electronics fail

Note
An electronic failure is indicated only if the corresponding function can
no longer be performed.

6.17.1 Reverse airflow -insufficient cooling capacity-

1 Plug for hydraulic cooling pump

1 Pull the plug (1).


– Fan goes to maximum speed, 100% cooling capacity.

6 - 126 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Actions to take if the electronics fail

6.17.2 Steering failure (optional with joystick steering)


Note
In the event of steering failure, the angle of the wheel can be adjusted
by manually pressing the corresponding valve spool.

2 Left valve spool (not visible, opposite side)


3 Right valve spool (in direction of travel)

1 Press and hold right valve spool (3):


– Wheel turns to the right.
2 Press and hold left valve spool (2):
– Wheel turns to the left.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 127


Operation - Towing

6.18 Towing
CAUTION
Use a steel cable with an appropriate strength rating when towing a
defective machine. Do not use the holes in the shackles and eyes
welded to the undercarriage for towing (these are intended solely for
securing the machine during transport).
Note
An emergency actuating mechanism that permits emergency towing of
the vehicle in the event of loss of control pressure or a faulty hydraulic
motor is located on the power shift transmission
CAUTION
If the emergency actuating mechanism is not properly deactivated, the
transmission will be damaged during normal operation. Because the
transmission is not lubricated during towing, the following procedures
must be observed:

 Towing speed: max. 10 km/h (6 mph)


 Distance towed: max. 5 km (3 miles)
For longer distances, the defective machine is to be transported using
a suitable lowboy trailer.
CAUTION
The parking brake does not function, if the emergency actuating
mechanism has been activated.
No attempt to shift gears should be made, if the emergency actuating
mechanism has been activated.

WARNING
The grease nipple (1) on the emergency actuating mechanism is
not to be used for lubrication purposes. It is used exclusively for
activating the emergency actuation. The gearbox can be
destroyed!

6 - 128 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Operation - Towing

Valve and
nipple overview

3
2 1

3 Pressure-relief valve
2 Bleed valve
3 1 Lubrication nipple

825 + 830 / 01.2010 6 - 129


Operation - Towing

Emergency actuation 1 Shut off the engine.


activated
2 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away.
3 Using a commercially available grease gun, pump grease into
the grease nipple (1) until it appears again at the pressure relief
valve (3) on the emergency actuating mechanism.

Emergency actuation 1 Open the bleed valve (2) on the emergency actuating
deactivated mechanism.
2 Select on-road operation.
3 Apply the driving brake.
4 Close the bleed valve again.

6 - 130 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Transportation - Safety instructions

7 Transportation
Preliminary work Transport the machine using a flat bed truck. Carry out the following
preliminary work:
 Select a suitable transport vehicle.
Note the dimensions (Section7.2) and weight (Section7.3) of the
machine.
 Clean machine.
 Place the boom and arm in the transport positions.
 Lock upper structure and undercarriage according to Section7.4.
 Secure the stabilizers in accordance with instructions.
 If necessary, remove attachments.

7.1 Safety instructions


WARNING
 In Germany:
Loading and transportation work is only to be carried out by
authorized specialist personnel in accordance with VBG 40, §48 and
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (StVo) §22.
 Observe the relevant regulations for securing of loads.
The respective transport operator is always responsible for the
transportation of machine and accessories.
 When loading and transporting, secure the machine and its working
equipment from unintended movement.
 Clean running gear of machine from mud, snow and ice so that
ramps can be accessed without danger of sliding.
 Provide low loader access ramps with wooden planks.
 Check conditions of route before starting journey.
 Only transport machine using designated tie-down and lifting points.
 Ensure that the machine does not present any hazards to other road
users.
 Wear personal protection equipment (e. g. safety helmet, protective
gloves, safety boots).
 Report any damage that occurred during shipping to
SENNEBOGEN customer service immediately.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 7-1


Transportation - Machine dimensions

7.2 Machine dimensions

7.2.1 Mobile
Type MP 30 D

Measurement information [mm]

Load boom Grab arm Transport Transport


length (L) height (H)
K15 8.5 m 7.0 m 12.45 m 3.40 m
K17 9.8 m 7.5 m 13.75 m 3.60 m
B16 9.4 m 7.0 m 13.40 m 3.55 m
K14 ULM 8.5 m 6.0 m 12.45 m 3.45 m

7-2 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Transportation - Machine dimensions

Type MP 31 D
(Optional)

Measurement information [mm]

Load boom Grab arm Transport Transport


length (L) height (H)
K15 8.5 m 7.0 m 12.50 m 3.50 m
K17 9.8 m 7.5 m 13.90 m 3.50 m
B16 9.4 m 7.0 m 13.40 m 3.50 m
K14 ULM 8.5 m 6.0 m 12.50 m 3.50 m

825 + 830 / 01.2010 7-3


Transportation - Machine dimensions

7.2.2 Crawler
Type T41/380

Measurement information [mm]

Load Grab Transpo Transpo Transpo


boom arm rt length rt height rt height
(L) (H1)* (H2)*
K15 8.5 m 7.0 m 12.50 m - 3.35 m
K17 9.8 m 7.5 m 13.80 m 3.36 m 3,65 m
B16 9.4 m 7.0 m 13.40 m - 3.50 m
Banana
K14 ULM 8.5 m 6.0 m 12.50 m 3.50 m 3.75 m

*Basic unit with at least 200 mm support

7-4 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Transportation - Machine dimensions

Type R35/240

Measurement information [mm]

Load Grab Transpo Transport height


boom arm rt length (H)*
(L)
K12 6,8 m 5,6 m 10,38 m 3,35 m
K13 7,5 m 5,8 m 11,80 m 3,50 m

825 + 830 / 01.2010 7-5


Transportation - Machine weight

7.2.3 Structure (4-point sub-frame)


Note
More information on the dimensions can be found in .

7.2.4 Rails
Note
More information on the dimensions can be found in Chapter 3.6.2
ABMESSUNGEN MASCHINE (SCHIENE / 4-PUNKT UNTERGESTELL).

7.3 Machine weight

Undercarriag Mobile Crawler Structure Rails


e
Weight approx. 36.0 approx. 43.0 Customer- Customer-
t t specific specific

Note
The machine weight may deviate from these figures due to optional
attachments. The information on the weight of the engine, the
undercarriage and the compact loading equipment may also vary.

Note
More information can be found in Chapter 3.5 SUPPLEMENTAL
INFORMATION.

7-6 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Transportation - Lock upper structure

7.4 Lock upper structure

1 Move the upper structure to driving position.


2 Close slewing gear holding brake.
3 Pin and secure the locking rod (1) on undercarriage and upper
structure.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 7-7


Transportation - Lifting machine

7.5 Lifting machine


Safety instructions Observe the safety notes before starting
work.
DANGER
 Sling machine only at the designated slinging points. The slinging
points are marked green and have a green loading hook symbol.
 Ensure that the lifting gear has a sufficient safe working load and a
secure stability.
 The following is suitable lifting gear:
– crane
– telescopic crane
 Ensure that the slinging equipment has sufficient safe working load
and is intact.
 The following is suitable slinging gear:
– chain slinging gear
– cable slinging gear
– round loops / sling devices
 Be careful of the danger zone!
There must be no-one next to, on or below the machine.

Procedures with F1 F2
counterweights

1 Select a suitable hoisting crane and slinging equipment.


Observe weight and centre of gravity of the machine.
2 Fasten the suspension equipment on hoisting points F1 and
F2.
3 Hoist machine carefully.

DANGER
There must be no one below a suspended load!

7-8 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Transportation - Lifting machine

Hoisting point weight


Weight on hoisting points F1 and F2:

MP 30 D MP 31 D T41/380
F1 t t t
F2 t t t
FTot. approx. 38 t approx. 38 t approx. 43 t

825 + 830 / 01.2010 7-9


Transportation - Tie down machine

7.6 Tie down machine

CAUTION
 Secure machine at the designated tie-down points (1). The tie-down
points are marked in green and are located on the undercarriage.
 Ensure that the slinging equipment has sufficient safe working load
and is intact.
 Ensure that the machine is not damaged if additional securing is
necessary.
 The respective transport operator is always responsible for the
transportation of machine and accessories.

1 1

Front view Rear view

1 1

7 - 10 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Transportation - Disconnect electrical system from battery

7.7 Disconnect electrical system from battery


If the machine is idle for an extended period or for long transport
distances, the electrical system must be isolated from the battery using
the mechanical battery isolator switch.

WARNING
Do not switch off mechanical battery isolator switch if:
 the engine is still running
 or other electrical consumers are still switched on.
Doing so may damage the electrical system and its controller.

1 Open left rear maintenance panel.


2 Turn the battery isolation switch (1) to the left (counter-
clockwise) and extract.
The electrical system is now isolated from the battery.
3 Close maintenance panel.

Note
If no mechanical battery isolation switch exists, the battery poles must
be disconnected. Properly install the battery protective caps again.

1 Open left rear service panel.


2 IMPORTANT! Prevent short circuits!
Disconnecting: 1. Disconnect the negative pole
2. Disconnect the positive pole
Connecting: 1. Connect the positive pole
2. Connect the negative pole
3 Close service panel.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 7 - 11


Transportation - Disconnect electrical system from battery

7 - 12 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Troubleshooting - Driving engine

8 Troubleshooting
WARNING
 Read Chapter 1 SAFETY.
 The personnel for maintenance, inspection and troubleshooting
must have the appropriate qualifications for this work.
 For work not described in detail, please notify SENNEBOGEN
Customer Service Desk.

8.1 Driving engine

Engine does not start Cause Remedy


Battery power too – Check fluid level of batteries.
low – Recharge or replace battery.
– Start machine using auxiliary battery.
Fuel tank empty – Refuel machine.

Engine performance Cause Remedy


Suction resistance too – Exchange filter element in water
high separator.

Machine does not move Cause Remedy


Parking brake actuated – Release parking brake.
Transmission defective – Have fault remedied.

Oil or fuel leaks from Cause Remedy


engine
Hose connections – Tighten hose connections.
loose
Hoses or seals – Exchange hoses or seals.
damaged

Note
Also observe the notes in the operating instructions of the engine
manufacturer.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 8-1


Troubleshooting - Hydraulic system:

8.2 Hydraulic system:

Oil leaks from hydraulic Cause Remedy


system
Hose connections loose – Tighten hose connections.
Hoses or seals – Exchange hoses or seals.
damaged

Hydraulic pump Cause Remedy


not working
Fault in pump circuit – Have fault inspected and rectified by
hydraulic specialist.

No or faulty function of Cause Remedy


operating equipment
Hydraulic oil level too – Check hydraulic oil level.
low – Top up hydraulic oil , if required.
Leaks in – Check working cylinder, connections
Hydraulic system and hoses for leaks.
– Have fault rectified by hydraulic
specialist.
Fault in one of the – Have fault rectified by hydraulic
working circuits specialist.

Noises when moving a Cause Remedy


working cylinder
Piston rod of – Have repair carried out by hydraulic
cylinder without specialist.
lubrication

8-2 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Troubleshooting - Hydraulic system:

No or low Cause Remedy


power in hydraulic
system Hose connections loose – Tighten hose connections.
Hoses or seals – Exchange hoses or seals.
damaged
Pressure relief valve – Have fault rectified by hydraulic
opens too soon specialist.
Hydraulic pump worn or – Have pump exchanged by hydraulic
defective specialist.

Noises in Cause Remedy


Hydraulic system
Hydraulic pump takes in – Have fault rectified by hydraulic
air specialist.
Hydraulic pump delivers – Check hydraulic oil level.
insufficient oil – Top up hydraulic oil , if required.
Pressure relief valve – Have fault rectified by hydraulic
chatters specialist.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 8-3


Troubleshooting - Heater

8.3 Heater

No or Cause Remedy
insufficient
heat output Water intake – Allow engine to warm up.
temperature too low – Replace thermostat (in air conditioning
system).
Thermostat on vehicle – Replace vehicle thermostat.
defective
Water valve does not – Check valve and valve actuation, if
open necessary replace. Note direction of
flow.
Heat exchanger fins – Clean heat exchanger.
dirty
Filter contaminated – Clean filter, replace if necessary.
No air flow – see below.

No air flow Cause Remedy


Fuse defective – Replace fuse.
Power supply – Check lines for loose contacts or open
interrupted circuit.
Fan motor defective – Have blower motor replaced.
Blower switch defective – Check switch, replace if necessary.
Resistor defective – Have resistor replaced.

Heater cannot be Cause Remedy


switched off
Bowden cable for water – Adjust Bowden cable.
valve incorrectly
adjusted
Heating valve – Check flow direction at valve, if
incorrectly fitted necessary change supply and return
line.
Actuation or Bowden – Exchange actuation or Bowden cable.
cable defective

8-4 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Troubleshooting - tires and undercarriage

8.4 tires and undercarriage

Oil leaks on Cause Remedy


differential,
hubs or Sealing plug loose – Tighten sealing plug.
Axle distributor gear Seals damaged – Replace seals.

Oil leaks from Cause Remedy


slewing gear
Loose connections – Tighten connections.

Rotary transmission Cause Remedy


leaking
Seals damaged – Replace seals.
Lines loose – Tighten locking bolts.

Noises in slewing gear Cause Remedy


Insufficient lubrication – Lubricate spur ring according to
on slewing ring gearing lubrication plan.

8.5 Cab
Cab moves or swings Cause Remedy
drastically
Cab mounting or cab – Check all connection elements, bolts
fastening damaged and pins of cab mounting and fastening
for damage, cracks or deformation.
– Have damaged components
exchanged immediately by trained and
instructed specialist personnel.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 8-5


Troubleshooting - SDS fault indicators

8.6 SDS fault indicators

Symbol flashes, Cause Remedy


Buzzer sounds
and red "Attention" Hydraulic oil – Allow engine to run without load until
illuminates temperature too high hydraulic oil has cooled.
(>84 °C/183 °F)
Cooling fins on – Clean cooling fins on oil cooler.
hydraulic oil cooler
soiled
Hydraulic oil level too – Check oil level acc. to maintenance
low instructions.
– Top up hydraulic oil, if required .

Symbol flashes, Cause Remedy


Buzzer sounds and
red "Attention" Insufficient fuel in tank – Refuel machine acc. to Section6.16.
illuminates

Symbol flashes, Cause Remedy


Buzzer sounds
and red Engine overheating – Run engine at idling speed.
"Attention" illuminates Cooling fins on engine – Clean cooling fins on oil cooler.
oil cooler soiled
Fan drive loose or – Tighten fan drive; replace, if necessary.
defective
Coolant level too – Top up coolant according to
low maintenance instructions.
Engine switched off – After operating, allow engine to run in
without cooling phase. low idle for approx. 5-10 minutes before
switching off.

8-6 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Troubleshooting - SDS fault indicators

Symbol flashes, Cause Remedy


Buzzer sounds and
red "Attention" Motor oil pressure too – Shut down engine immediately.
illuminates low (<1.3 bar/18.9 psi) – Check engine oil level acc. to
maintenance instructions.
– Top up motor oil if necessary.
– If it happens again,
Notify SENNEBOGEN customer
service

Symbol flashes, Cause Remedy


Buzzer sounds and
Battery charge too weak – Check battery charge; recharge
red "Attention"
batteries or exchange, if necessary.
illuminates
– Check battery connections, tighten
terminals if necessary.
– Check the belt tension and tighten or
replace if necessary.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 8-7


Troubleshooting - SDS fault indicators

Warning and indicator lights

illuminate, Cause Remedy


warning buzzer
sounds Coolant level too low – Top up coolant.

Illuminates Cause Remedy


when
engine is Accumulator pressure – Have a hydraulic specialist check the
too low hydraulic system.

illuminates, Cause Remedy


buzzer sounds
Hydraulic oil level too low – Top up hydraulic oil

lights up Cause Remedy


Slewing gear holder – Deactivate slewing gear holding brake
brake applied

lights up Cause Remedy


Return filter is clogged – Check return filter; if necessary,
replace in accordance with
maintenance instructions.

lights up Cause Remedy


HydroClean Superfine – HydroClean Check micro-filter,
filter is plugged replace if necessary.

8-8 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Troubleshooting - SDS fault indicators

lights up Cause Remedy


Auxiliary control filter is – Check auxiliary control filter, if
blocked necessary change acc. to
maintenance instructions.

lights up Cause Remedy


Air filter contaminated – Clean filter acc. to maintenance
instructions.
– If necessary, replace filter element.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 8-9


Troubleshooting - SDS fault indicators

8 - 10 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Setup work - Safety instructions

9 Setup work
9.1 Safety instructions
DANGER
 The work performed may only be completed by trained
professionals.
 Wear personal protection equipment (e.g. safety helmet, ear
protection, protective gloves, safety boots) where working conditions
require. At working heights of 2.00 m or more, SENNEBOGEN
recommends the use of safety equipment to prevent falling.
 The following applies for all set-up work:
Only carry out the work if the work area is level and solid enough.
 Ensure that there is no one in the danger zone.
– While setting up – before completing all tightening – no persons
are allowed in the hazardous area in which loads could fall or
under hanging loads.
– During the set-up procedure keep a sufficient safety-margin from
areas of unavoidable cutting or pinching/crushing danger.
 Observe the relevant accident prevention directives for working with
load suspension equipment.
 When dismantling components or equipment, always use load
suspension equipment with a sufficient load bearing capacity.
 Suspend components only with the designated lifting brackets.
 Do not step on equipment that is not designed for it (e.g. parts of the
boom or the counterweights), hanging on a crane.
 Carry out all set-up steps in turn. Never carry out more than one set-
up task at a time.

Note
The setup works to be carried out depend on the operating tools that
have been selected. Observe the notes in the operating instructions of
the tool manufacturer.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 9-1


Setup work - Safety instructions

WARNING
There may be dangers during operation to persons, machine and other
property, if

 the setting of the safety limit position sensor for "Arm in" was not
adjusted for the attached tool
 the operating tools attached do not comply with the relevant safety
regulations
 the tools have not been approved by SENNEBOGEN
 the operating tools attached are found to be defective.
The machine operator is wholly liable for any damage or consequential
damage caused by tools!
This damage is excluded from the terms of the warranty issued by
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH.

9-2 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Setup work - Dismantling/assembling the cab

9.2 Dismantling/assembling the cab


DANGER
Danger to life from falling cab
 The cab must be assembled/dismantled by trained and instructed
technicians only!
 Always replace any bolts after dismantling, do not reuse.
 Bolts, tension and retaining elements for cab supports are to be
checked by qualified personnel and replaced if necessary before
reusing.
 Only use genuine SENNEBOGEN spare parts.

Note
The locking bar can also be used for fastening the cab. This requires
using the two fastening points (1).

825 + 830 / 01.2010 9-3


Setup work - Mounting/dismounting counterweight

9.3 Mounting/dismounting counterweight

Note
The mass of the counterweight is cast into its upper surface. The
counterweight can be removed to transport the machine.
DANGER
Machine can tip over.
The machine is not operational with counterweight removed.
4

6
1
a

max. 90°
2
7

3
8

1 Threaded attachment points 5 Tail light fastening bolts


for lifting eyes
6 Suspension equipment
2 Rear hexagonal bolt
7 Counterweight
3 Lower hexagonal bolt
8 Spacer packs
4 Tail light plug connector
a Bracket for suspension
equipment: 90°

9-4 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Setup work - Mounting/dismounting counterweight

9.3.1 Dismantling the counterweight


1 Place the upper structure in the direction of travel.
Place the working tools/equipment on the ground.
2 Unscrew the taillight mounting screws (5); withdraw the
taillights slightly. Carefully unplug the connector (4) from each
taillight.
3 Screw the two lifting eyes included with the on-board
accessories into the threaded attachment points (1) for the
counterweight completely.
4 Attach suitable slinging gear (6) to the assisting crane and the
lifting eyes on the counterweight (7).

DANGER
Bracket “a“ between the machine and the suspension equipment must
always be 90°.
If the angle is greater or less, the counterweight can tip away from the
machine or injure persons or damage parts of the machine.

5 Unscrew the lower hex-head bolt (3) from the counterweight.


6 Carefully unscrew the rear hex-head bolt (2).

DANGER
Squashing and crushing can occur.
Occupying the space under a suspended load is prohibited.
7 Swing the counterweight (7) to the rear slightly and lift away.
Deposit the counterweight in a safe location and secure against
tipping.
8 Remove both spacer packs (8) and retain for use when re-
installing in the future. ATTENTION! Do not interchange the left
and right sides.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 9-5


Setup work - Mounting/dismounting counterweight

9.3.2 Installing the counterweight

1 Attach suitable slinging gear (6) to the assisting crane and the
lifting eyes on the counterweight (7).
2 Place both spacer packs (8) on the support blocks in the correct
positions.

DANGER
Squashing and crushing can occur.
There must be no one below a suspended load.

3 Lift the counterweight (7) onto the machine by means of the


assisting crane.

CAUTION
Secure the bolts (2) and (3) with “Loctite 270“ each time you mount the
counterweight!
Follow the instructions on the “Loctite” package!

4 Attach the counterweight (7) to the machine using the rear hex-
head bolt (2).
5 Screw in the lower hex-head bolt (3).
6 Using a torque wrench, tighten the rear hex-head bolt (2) with
a torque of 2350 Nm. Using a torque wrench, tighten the lower
hex-head bolt (3) with a torque of 960 Nm.
7 Remove the slinging gear (6).
8 Unscrew both lifting eyes from the counterweight (7) stow with
the on-board accessories.
9 Re-attach the taillight connectors (4), place the taillights in the
recesses in the counterweight (7) and tighten the mounting
screws (5).

9-6 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Setup work - Installing large roller bearings, slewing gear, flange connections

9.4 Installing large roller bearings, slewing gear,


flange connections

9.4.1 General
This supplementary information applies to the installation of large roller
bearings and flange connections (FV). This concerns e.g.:
 Flange connection between the upper structure and the gearing
 Flange connection between the upper structure and the slewing ring
 Flange connection between the slewing ring and the lower assembly
 Flange connection between the slewing ring and intermediate ring
and the lower assembly
 Flange connection between the slewing ring and the pylon and
intermediate ring and the lower assembly
 Flange connection between the pylon and pylon

DANGER
 Make sure that there is no-one within the hazardous area before
starting the installation!
 Pay attention to dimensions and weight according to the operating
instructions.
 Observe general safety information for the installation according to
the operating instructions.

9.4.2 Preparatory measures


In order to guarantee a secure connection between the individual
components, several important preparations are required:
 The flange surfaces on the slewing ring are to be kept free of
corrosion.
 Make absolutely sure that all surfaces including holes, e.g. the lower
assembly flange are free of grease. If there is grease in the holes,
there is a danger of pushing the grease into the threads in the
slewing ring with the bolts.
This additional grease in the threads can greatly decrease the
required friction under certain circumstances. The bolt can be
damaged without your recognizing it or it could even break
eventually.
No additional oil or grease is to be used for bolted connections e.g.
"lower assembly flange-slewing ring, pylon-slewing ring". The bolts and
pins are to be installed as delivered.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 9-7


Setup work - Installing large roller bearings, slewing gear, flange connections

9.4.3 Assembly
There are a few important points to observe for the installation:
 Slewing gear bolts that are already used are not to be reused under
any circumstances.
 Clean all contact surfaces of the flange connections of any oil and
grease.
 Galvanized or coated surfaces must be treated previously with
AKTIVATOR T 747 because LOCTITE - 586 is only permitted on
activated surfaces.
 LOCTITE - 586 is to be applied on a surface with a brush.
 Centering pins are not to come into contact with Loctite since
disassembly can become difficult
--> Apply wax or grease to centering pins!
 Tighten bolts according to the torque specifications in alternating
sequence (i.e. 2nd across from the 1st). After approx. 2 hours, the
Loctite begins to adhere. Full strength is achieved after 12 - 24
hours.

1) Upper structure
2) Slewing ring
3) Pylon or lower assembly
4) Pylon
Flange connection with Loctite

4
3

9-8 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Setup work - Installing large roller bearings, slewing gear, flange connections

9.4.4 Mounting pylon


Danger
 Place machine on firm, completely horizontal ground.
 The (stationary) sub-frame must be aligned horizontally on all sides
before mounting the pylon.
 The ballast must be attached to the sub frame before mounting the
pylon.

Caution
When mounting the pylon ensure that there is no one in the danger
area below the machine/pylon.

1 Raise the machine using a suitable auxiliary crane in order to


fit the pylon. Observe Section7.5.
2 Attach pylon using the bolts (2) provided to the undercarriage -
note tightening torque!
3 Attach base unit to pylon using the bolts (2) provided - note
tightening torque!

3
4 1 Ball bearing slewing rim
2 hexagonal bolt
2
3 Hexagonal nut
1 4 Washer
5 Spacer tube
4
6 Pylon
2
5
4
6
3
4
5
2
5
4

825 + 830 / 01.2010 9-9


Setup work - Quick-change couplings

9.5 Quick-change couplings

9.5.1 Fastening quick couplings


To ensure problem-free functioning and operating safety of the
hydraulic system, follow these instructions.
Note
Ignoring or infringing against these instructions exonerates
SENNEBOGEN from any responsibility for parts which are damaged or
lose their tightness as a result of getting dirty.

3
5

1 4

5
Coupling insert Coupling sleeve

Before fastening the quick couplings:

1 De-pressurize the hydraulic system as described in .


2 Remove protective caps (3) from coupling sleeve (4) and
coupling insert (1).
3 Clean coupling sleeve (4) and coupling insert (1), particularly
the end surfaces (5) with a clean cloth.
4 Coupling insert (1):
Check the contact surface (2) of the ball insert for wear. If the
contact surface (2) is heavily worn, replace with a new coupling
insert.
Check sealing ring for wear and replace if necessary (see
Chapter 9.5.3).

9 - 10 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Setup work - Quick-change couplings

3
5

1 4

5
Coupling insert Coupling sleeve

incorrec correct

5 Lay the end surfaces (5) of the coupling insert (1) and the
coupling sleeve (4) flat against one another.
6 Insert the coupling insert (1) into the coupling sleeve (4) until
you hear the coupling insert (1) engage.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 9 - 11


Setup work - Quick-change couplings

4 Illustrated:
Safety ring (7) opened
7
6

1
3
7

Quick coupling Illustrated:


fastened Safety ring (7) engaged

7 Push safety ring (7) down onto the coupling sleeve (4) and
rotate slightly until the safety ring (7) engages.
This will prevent the catch from opening by itself.
8 Push together the protective caps (3) of the coupling sleeve (4)
and the coupling insert (1) to protect from dirt.

9 - 12 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Setup work - Quick-change couplings

9.5.2 Pull out coupling insert

4 Illustrated:
Safety ring (7) opened
7
6

1
3
7

Quick coupling Illustrated:


fastened Safety ring (7) engaged

1 De-pressurizing hydraulic system.


2 Twist safety ring (7) on the coupling sleeve until it automatically
disengages.
3 Hold the coupling insert (1) firmly and push the outer part (6) of
the coupling sleeve carefully upwards.
4 Remove coupling insert (1).
5 Clean coupling insert (1), coupling sleeve (4) and protective
caps (3) with a clean cloth.
Push protective caps (3) onto the coupling insert (1) and the
coupling sleeve (4).

825 + 830 / 01.2010 9 - 13


Setup work - Quick-change couplings

9.5.3 Check/change sealing ring


Check the sealing ring in the coupling insert at regular intervals for
wear. Replace if necessary.

Check sealing ring

To check the sealing ring (2), push down on the sealing disc of the
coupling insert (1) with a suitable tool ((3) e.g. drift).

Change the sealing ring

1 Push down on the sealing disc of the coupling insert (1) with a
suitable tool ((3) e.g. drift).
2 Lever out the sealing ring (2) with special tool (4).

Note
The special tool (4) is supplied by SENNEBOGEN (serial No.: 078581).

9 - 14 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Setup work - Quick-change couplings

3 Place new sealing ring (2) with the open side facing down onto
the sealing disc.
4 Push down on the sealing disc of the coupling insert (1) with a
suitable tool ((3) e.g. drift).
5 Press sealing ring (2) together and insert into the groove.
6 Remove tool (3).
The sealing disc must rise upwards.
If necessary, adjust the sealing ring until the sealing disc can
move.

825 + 830 / 01.2010 9 - 15


Setup work - Quick-change couplings

9.5.4 Lubricating the coupling sleeve

Lubrication nipple for coupling

The lubrication nipple for the coupling sleeve enables easy coupling
and decoupling in summer and winter.
Lubricating the coupling sleeve reduces water and dust from
penetrating the coupling.

Note
Lubricating the coupling sleeve and/or using the lubrication nipple is not
a replacement for use of the protective cap.

The lubrication nipple for the coupling sleeve is available from the
SENNEBOGEN Service Center (telephone +49 9421 540277 or
540278).

Procedure

1 Remove the protective cap of the coupling sleeve.


2 Clean coupling sleeve and its lubrication nipple, particularly the
end surfaces with a clean cloth.
3 Lay the end surfaces of the coupling sleeve lubrication nipple
and the coupling sleeve itself flat against one another.
4 Insert the lubrication nipple into the coupling sleeve until you
hear the nipple engage.
5 Place a hand grease gun onto the lubrication nipple and
lubricate the coupling sleeve with cold-resistant grease.
6 Remove the hand grease gun and the lubrication nipple for the
coupling sleeve.
7 Attach the safety cap to the coupling sleeve.

9 - 16 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Setup work - Quick-change couplings

825 + 830 / 01.2010 9 - 17


Setup work - Quick-change couplings

9 - 18 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Appendix - List of abbreviations

10 Appendix
10.1List of abbreviations

TUR Trade Union Regulations


Oh Hours of operation
or or
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
Fa. Firm
FOPS Falling Objects Protective Structure
FV Flange connection
ggf. if necessary
GmbH Limited liability corporation
HAB Lifting platform
LED Light emitting diodes
HGV Truck
LMB Load moment limiter
LpA Constant sound-pressure level
LWA Sound power level
max. maximum
min. minimum
No. Number
MMI Control/display unit for magnet system
SDS SENNEBOGEN Diagnostic System
FMVSS Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
UCTU Underground Construction Trade Union
ACTU Association of Commercial Trade Unions
e.g.: for example

825 + 830 / 01.2010 10 - 1


Appendix - Index

10.2 Index

10.3Driver's seat

10.4Clean the cooling system

10.5Quick-connect couplings

10.6Installing large roller bearings, slewing gear,


flange connections

10.7Warranty conditions

10.8Electrical water heater

10.9Lubricants table

10 - 2 825 + 830 / 01.2010


Index

A Lubricants 1-45
Adverse conditions 3-2 Disposal Guideline 75/439/EEC 1-45
Air filter 2-12 Disposal of consumables 1-45
Air pressure 4-5 Disposing of batteries 1-45
Ambient temperature range 4-1 Disposing of lubricants 1-45
Antifreeze 5-17, 5-18 Disposing of the oil filter 1-45
Attachments 1-2 Drive
Auslandeinsatz 1-13 forward 6-55
Automatic idle 6-33 reverse 6-55
Automatic rpm 6-33 with a suspended load 6-78, 6-85
Axle distributor gear 4-5 Drive pedal 6-9, 6-28
Driver's cab 2-1, 2-4
B Driver's doors 6-3
Batteries 2-12 Driving earth-moving machinery 1-26
Battery Acid 5-24 Driving engine 3-1, 4-3, 4-4
Battery isolator switch 2-10, 2-12 Driving the machine 6-78, 6-85
Beaufort scale 4-11
Bio-oils 1-21 E
Bypassing the safety limit position sensor for Ear protection 1-25, 1-26
"Arm in" 6-102 Effect
wind 4-11
C Electrical control cabinet 2-12
Cab 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 2-4 Electrical switching cabinet 2-11
Cab suspension 6-73 Emergency exit 6-2
CE certificate of conformity 1-6 Emergency lowering
Central lubrication system 2-11, 2-12, 5-10, 6- Cab 2-11
33 in cab 6-76
Chloride 1-23 in storage compartment 6-77
Chloride content 1-23 Emergency lowering – cab 2-12
Commissioning 5-1 EMERGENCY STOP switch 2-15
Compact boom 2-4 Engine compartment 2-12
Control lever 6-8, 6-10 Environmental protection 1-45
Control lever, left-hand 6-14 Environmental regulations 1-45
Coolant level 5-17, 5-18 Exhaust silencer 2-13
Cooling system 5-17 Extending outriggers 5-8
Counterweight 2-4
Customer service W-9 F
Fault diagnosis 8-1
D Fault Displays (SDS) 6-56, 8-6
Danger area 1-25 Filler hose 2-11
Danger of crushing 1-25 Filler neck - fuel tank 2-11
Decommissioning 5-26, 5-30 First aid box 1-14, 1-15
Decommissioning machine 5-26, 5-27, 5-30, 5- Floating axle 2-5
31 Floating axle cylinder 2-5
Deploying (extending) the supports 6-82 Floating axle lock 6-26, 6-33
Differential: 4-5 Front axle 2-5
Disposal Front windshield 6-3
Batteries 1-45 Fuel filler neck 2-11

825 + 830 / 10.2010 S-1


Index

Fuel system 5-14 Lifting gear 7-8


Fuel tank 2-11, 4-5, 4-7, 4-8, 4-9 Lifting points 7-8
Fuel tank display 6-39 Light emitting diodes 6-39
Fuse Limitations during wind 4-1
Preheat 2-14 List of abbreviations 10-1
Load -
G lift 6-97
Grab arm 2-4 lower 6-97
Grab, slew right 6-14 Load moment limiter (LML) 6-62
Grabber, slew left 6-14, 6-18 Locking rod 7-7
Lowering/reducing lifting capacities 3-2
H Lubricate the machine 3-4
Hand signals 1-46 Lubricating path 5-10, 6-33
Hand signals for directing 1-46 Lubrication cycle 5-10
Heater 6-8, 6-10 Lubrication nipple 3-4
High voltage contact 1-28 Lubrication nipples-overview 3-5
Hoisting limit sensor 6-100, 6-101
Holding open driver’s doors 6-3 M
Hydraulic oil pre-heater 6-69 Machine
Hydraulic oil tank 2-12 hoisting 7-8
Hydraulic system: 4-5, 4-7, 4-8, 4-9 machine 6-78, 6-85
Hydraulic tank 4-5, 4-7, 4-8, 4-9 stabilizing 6-81
Hydraulics 4-1 tie-down 7-10
HydroClean - fine filtration system (optional) 2- Machine Labeling 1-5
13 Machine number 1-5
Machine operating area 1-25
I Machine operator’s workplace 1-2
Ignition key 5-21 Main fuse
Illustration aids W-4 Electrics 2-14
Impermissible operating practices 1-13 Main switch 2-15
Indicator light - EMR 6-55 Maintaining earth moving machines 1-26
Indicator lights 6-55 Maintenance instructions W-7
Inhaling exhaust gasses 5-21 Maintenance schedule 4-1
Initial operation 5-3 Maneuvering cab 6-74
Installing/removing the counterweight 9-4 Manual lubrication 3-4
Intended use 1-2 Maximum stability 1-27
Interior lighting 6-4 Measurement ports - hydraulic system 2-12
Misuse 1-2, 1-3, 1-4
J
Jump start 5-24 N
National regulations 1-1
K Nominal speed 5-23
Keypad (SDS) 6-39
Keyword W-4 O
Oil diagnosis 1-20
L Oil filler pipe 5-13
Lifting capacities 3-2 Opening front windshield 6-3
Lifting force 3-2 Operation 6-1

S -2 825 + 830 / 10.2010


Index

operation of the machine in an explosive env- Safety equipment 1-25


ironment. 1-4 Safety helmet 1-25
Outside air mode 6-29 Safety lever 6-8, 6-10, 6-13
Overhead lines 1-28 Safety limit position sensor for "Arm in" 6-98
Overload warning device 1-44 Safety regulations 1-13
Overseas use 1-16 Sales and service partners W-9
Overview of the machine as a whole 2-1 SDS 6-38
SDS fault indicators 8-6
P Securing the upper structure 7-7
Parking brake 6-9, 6-11, 6-28 SENNEBOGEN Diagnostic System
Pedals 6-8, 6-10, 6-38 Self test 6-38
Personal safety equipment 1-25, 1-34, 1-40 Service panel - engine 2-13
Personnel qualifications 1-12 Service partners W-9
Personnel selection 1-12 Setup work 9-1
pH value 1-23 Shutting down the engine. 5-25
pH value, water 1-23 Signaling individual 1-46
Pipe rupture safety - arm cylinder 2-17 Slewing drive 4-1
Pipe rupture safety - hoisting cylinder 2-17 Slewing gear brake 6-96
Positioning brake 6-12 Slewing mechanism holding brake 6-13
Potential instances of misuse 1-3 Slewing ring 2-5
Power lines 1-28 Slewing the upper structure 6-94
Preheat 6-55 Slewing upper structure 6-94
Protective features 1-44 Slinging equipment 7-8, 7-10
Protective gloves 1-25 Spare parts catalogue. W-7
Pump unit 2-10, 2-12 Spare parts warehouse W-9
Pylon 2-4 Special dangers 1-13
speed of 4-1
Q Stability 1-26, 1-27, 1-29
Qualification of personnel 1-26 Stabilization 6-12
Stabilizer 2-5
R Start engine 5-21, 5-29
Rear axle 2-5 Starting up daily operation 5-3
Recirculating air mode 6-29 Starting up operating again 5-3
Refueling pump 2-11 Steering column 6-8, 6-25
Remedying faults 8-1 Steering wheel 6-8
Reservoir - washer water 6-8 Storage compartment 2-12
Responsibilities of the employer 1-7, 1-11 Storage location 5-26, 5-30
Restraint belt 5-20, 5-28 Sulfate content 1-23
Retracting stabilizers 6-84 Superstructure 2-4, 2-10
Reverse airflow – combination cooler 6-20, 6- Support housing 2-6
25, 6-27, 6-30 Support leg 2-6
Support pad 2-6
S Supporting the machine 6-81
Safe working loads 3-2 Swinging the load 1-27
Safety boots 1-25 Switching the motor off 5-29
Safety cable 2-6
Safety distance 1-25, 1-28 T
Safety distance from overhead lines 1-28 Telephone W-9

825 + 830 / 10.2010 S-3


Index

Telescoping 6-88, 6-91


the machine environment 1-25
The operating instructions are structured as
follows W-8
Tie-down points 7-10
Tip-over danger! 1-44, 6-26
Tipping load 3-2
Tire size 4-5
Tires - Air pressure 4-5
Top up hydraulic oil 5-13
Transmission 2-10, 2-12
Troubleshooting 8-1
Type plate 1-5

U
Undercarriage 2-1, 2-4, 2-7
use contrary to regulations 1-4

W
Warm-up period 5-23
warning lights 6-55
Warning lights (SDS) 6-55
Warning symbol W-4
Water hardness 1-23
Water heating system 2-12
Water separator 2-10
Weight of lifting gear 3-2
Wheel nuts 4-6, 4-8
Wind forces 4-2
Wind speed 4-11
Wind strength 4-11
Windscreen wiper 6-4
Windshield washer reservoir 2-12
Windshield washer system 6-4
Work tools 2-1
Working tools 9-1

S -4 825 + 830 / 10.2010


ISO signage
for material handling machine
818-860 Mobile

! DANGER
! WARNING SE
18
40
75

! CAUTION
SE 186583
NOTICE
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS

34
67
18
SE

SE 187222

SE
18
66
37
069
184
SE

SE 186737

en
WSS-rec-0244
Release date: 25. February 2016
Current revision status: 3
Printed copies are not subject to change.
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH
Hebbelstraße 30
94315 Straubing
Telephone: +49 9421 540-0
E-mail: doku@sennebogen.de
Internet: http://www.sennebogen.de

832374, 3, en_US

© 2016

2 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


Foreword

Foreword
Information on this sticker system This sticker system contains an overview of safety-relevant sig-
nage and is part of the operating manual.

The sticker system refers to the state of the machine upon delivery
by SENNEBOGEN. If changes are made to the machine's equip-
ment, the sticker system must be reviewed and modified as
needed.

Layout The sticker system is divided into sections on the cab, the upper-
carriage and the undercarriage. The overview graphics show the
positions of the stickers on the machine. These positions are num-
bered. The locations of adhesive signage are numbered consecu-
tively on the overview diagrams.

Optional stickers This sticker system includes the maximum number of warning and
safety signs. Optional stickers are indicated as such. Further infor-
mation on optional versions can be found in the operating manual.

Spare parts The operator must check spare parts for the necessary warning
and safety signage and apply this as needed.

If the machine leaves the original country of destination for a job,


the operator must make sure the warning and safety signage
meets the regulations of the new country and modify, add, or
change the signage accordingly.

DANGER!
Failure to observe warning and safety signage
can result in death or serious injury.
– Follow all warning and safety signage.
– Stay clear of the danger zone.

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 3


Foreword

4 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


Table of contents

Table of contents
1 ISO signage for the Maxcab cab........................................ 7
1.1 Overview diagrams of Maxcab cab............................... 7
1.2 ISO warning and safety signage for Maxcab cab....... 10
2 ISO signage for Mobile 818 - 860 undercarriage............ 21
2.1 Overview diagrams of Mobile 818-860 undercarriage 21
2.2 ISO warning and safety signs on Mobile 818-860
undercarriage.............................................................. 22
3 ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage........................ 27
3.1 Overview diagrams of 818-860 uppercarriage............ 27
3.2 ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercar-
riage............................................................................ 29
4 Index................................................................................... 57

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 5


Table of contents

6 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for the Maxcab cab
Overview diagrams of Maxcab cab

1 ISO signage for the Maxcab cab


1.1 Overview diagrams of Maxcab cab
Exterior cab

60

10

50 40 30 20 70

Fig. 1: Exterior cab signage

Interior cab

120 130
140
110

100 80

90 150

Fig. 2: Interior cab signage

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 7


ISO signage for the Maxcab cab
Overview diagrams of Maxcab cab

Cab platform and safety guard

210 220

160 170 180 190 200

Fig. 3: Cab platform and FOPS signage

8 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for the Maxcab cab
Overview diagrams of Maxcab cab

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 9


ISO signage for the Maxcab cab
ISO warning and safety signage for Maxcab cab

1.2 ISO warning and safety signage for Maxcab cab

10

Fire extinguisher label


General Fire extinguisher storage locations
application area
Option Fire extinguisher

www.sennebogen.de SE 123456

SE 184069

SE 184069

Information on the certification of TOPS as per ISO 12117 and DIN EN 474
General Exterior cab
TOPS application area
ISO 12117 - 2:2008

Option 1 TOPS cab


DIN EN 474 - 5:2013
SE 182877
FM 406103
mMAX CERT.: 80.000 kg
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH
Option 2 EU
Hebbelstrasse 30 D-94315 Straubing
SE 187225

SE 187225

20

Warning against collapse/falling when maximum platform load per section as per DIN EN ISO 2867
and ISO 11660-2 is exceeded. Do not exceed maximum platform load.
General Exterior cab, exterior uppercarriage
application area
max. 1
Option 1 Cab platform
max. 200 kg
max. 440 lb

SE 186994
Option 2 Uppercarriage platform

SE 186994

10 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for the Maxcab cab
ISO warning and safety signage for Maxcab cab

30

Machine must only be operated by authorized operators as per DIN EN 14502


General Exterior cab door
application area
Option EU
Smije koristiti samo ovlasteno osoblje.
SE 186983

SE 186983

Information on the height-adjustable control stand as per DIN EN 14502


General Exterior cab door
E270 - 2016 application area
SE 190322
....1400 kg
Option 1 Cab adjustment E270
....max. 250 kg / 551 lb

....max. 1 Option 2 EU
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH
Hebbelstrasse 30 D-94315 Straubing
SE 187237

SE 187237

40

WARNING. Rotating machine can cause death or serious injury. Stay clear of the danger zone.
General Exterior cab, exterior uppercarriage
application area
Option ---
SE 184075

SE 184075

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 11


ISO signage for the Maxcab cab
ISO warning and safety signage for Maxcab cab

50

WARNING. Lowering cab can result in crushing. Stay clear of the danger zone.
General Front exterior cab
application area
Option Cab adjustment
SE 186588

SE 186588

60

24 V socket label
General On every 24 V socket
application area

24 V Option 24 V socket
SE 186587

SE 186587

70

12 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for the Maxcab cab
ISO warning and safety signage for Maxcab cab

WARNING. Rotating machine can cause death or serious injury. Stay clear of the danger zone.
General Exterior cab, exterior uppercarriage
application area
Option ---
SE 184075

SE 184075

80

If you do not understand the language of the operating manual, you are not allowed to start the
machine.
General Interior cab
)

application area
Option ---

SE 186596

SE 186596

Sound power level dB(A), Outdoor Guideline LWA


Values: 85–115 dB
General Interior cab
LWA application area
Option EU

85 dB
SE 186761

SE 186761, 186762, 186851 - 186879

90

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 13


ISO signage for the Maxcab cab
ISO warning and safety signage for Maxcab cab

Instruction. Release the locking brake when jacked up.


General Interior cab
application area
Option Mobile undercarriage

SE 186639

SE 186639

110

Machine controller sticker


General applica- Interior cab
tion area
Option ---
SE Various

Operating mode sticker


General applica- Interior cab
tion area
Option Material handling machine, telescopic cranes
SE Various

Load lift chart sticker


General Interior cab
application area
Option Material handling machine
SE Various

120

14 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for the Maxcab cab
ISO warning and safety signage for Maxcab cab

Never leave the machine unattended with the engine running!


General Interior cab
de
Lassen Sie die Maschine nie bei
laufendem Motor unbeaufsichtigt!
Never let the machine unattended, while the engine is
hr Stroj tijekom rada motora ne ostavljajte bez nadzora.
Nekada gadijuma neatstajiet bez
application area
en lv
running! uzraudzibas mašinu ar ieslegtu motoru!
Ne jamais laisser la machine sans Niekada nepalikite mašinos su ijungtu
fr lt
surveillance lorsque le moteur tourne! varikliu be priežiuros!

Option ---
¡No deje nunca la máquina sin supervisión Maszyny z pracujacym silnikiem nigdy nie
es pl
c

cuando el motor esté en marcha! pozostawiac bez nadzoru!


Nunca deixe a máquina sem vigilância Nu lasati niciodata masina
pt ro
c

enquanto o motor se encontrar aceso! nesupravegheata cu motorul pornit!


Non lasciare incustodita la macchina con Maskinen må ikke være uten tilsyn når
it sv
il motore acceso! motoren går!
Laat de machine nooit onbeheerd achter Stroj so spusteným motorom nikdy
nl sk
als de motor draait! nenechávajte bez dozoru!
Категорически запрещается оставлять машину без Stroj mora biti pri delujocem motorju
ru sl
надзора при работающем двигателе! vedno pod nadzorom!
Никога не оставяйте машината при работещ Nikdy nenechávejte stroj bez dozoru,
bg cs
двигател без контрол! pokud bezí motor!
Lad aldrig maskinen stå uden opsyn, når Soha ne hagyja felügyelet nélkül a gépet
da hu
motoren kører! járó motorral!
Ärge kunagi jätke masinat järelvalveta kui Skiljið vélina aldrei eftir eftirlitslausa með vélina í
et is
mootor töötab! gangi.
Älä jätä konetta ilman valvontaa moottorin Maskinen må ikke være uten tilsyn når
fi no
käydessä! motoren går!
Μην αφήνετε χωρίς επίβλεψη το μηχάνημα ενώ Motor çalisir durumdayken makineyi
el tr
λειτουργεί ο κινητήρας! kesinlikle terk etmeyin!
SE 186638

SE 186638

Sound-pressure level dB(A) cab LPA


Values: 70–90 dB
General Interior cab
application area
LPA
Option 1 EU

70 dB Option 2 Height measurement


SE 186880

Other < 70 dB, no sticker


from 70 dB, the sticker in dB increments is affixed
from 85 dB, the label "Wear hearing protection" is also affixed
SE 186880 - 186900

Wear hearing protection


General Interior cab
application area
Option From sound-pressure level 85 dB

SE 186818

Emergency exit label


Material handling Rear interior cab
machine applica-
tion area
Other application Right interior cab
area
Option ---
SE 186583

SE 186583

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 15


ISO signage for the Maxcab cab
ISO warning and safety signage for Maxcab cab

130

Read the manual


General Interior cab, interior uppercarriage, undercarriage hitch, other
application area
Option 1 ---
Option 2 Hitch

SE 184072

Warning against falling out of cab. Wear seat belt.


General Interior cab
application area
Option Seat belt
SE 186585

SE 186585

WARNING. Electric current from overhead lines can result in death or serious injury. Maintain a safe
distance.
General Interior cab
application area
Option ---

SE 193129

SE 193129

16 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for the Maxcab cab
ISO warning and safety signage for Maxcab cab

WARNING. Falling loads can result in death or serious injury. Never stand under suspended loads.
General Interior cab
application area
Option ---
SE 193130

SE 193130

140

Emergency exit label


Material handling Rear interior cab
machine applica-
tion area
Other application Right interior cab
area
Option ---
SE 186583

SE 186583

150

Emergency drop label


General On emergency drop levers
application area
Option Cab adjustment

SE 184068

SE 184068

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 17


ISO signage for the Maxcab cab
ISO warning and safety signage for Maxcab cab

160 170 180 190

Warning sign hatching


General Outer edges of platform (machine boundaries), on shearing
application area points

186
734
Option Platform
SE

SE 187969

180

WARNING. Rotating machine can cause death or serious injury. Stay clear of the danger zone.
General Outer edges of platform (machine boundaries)
application area
Option Platform
SE 184075

SE 193120

200

18 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for the Maxcab cab
ISO warning and safety signage for Maxcab cab

Information on the certification of FOPS and front protective grating as per ISO 10262 and SAE J
1356
General Protective roof
FOPS
application area
# 645136

Option FOPS and front protective grating


ISO 10262:1998/
Corr 1:2009
SAE J 1356:2008

SE 175269
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH
Hebbelstrasse 30 D-94315 Straubing
SE 187224

SE 187224

210 220

Lifting point label


General On lifting points
application area
Option ---

SE 186792

SE 186792

Other stickers

Warning sign hatching


General On shearing points
application area

186
734
Option 1 Cab adjustment
SE

Option 2 Mobile undercarriage with claw support

SE 186734

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 19


ISO signage for the Maxcab cab
ISO warning and safety signage for Maxcab cab

20 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for Mobile 818 - 860 undercarriage
Overview diagrams of Mobile 818-860 undercarriage

2 ISO signage for Mobile 818 - 860 undercarriage


2.1 Overview diagrams of Mobile 818-860 undercarriage
Mobile 818-860 I undercarriage

430

370 420

410
365
400
390
380
365
330 300 320 310 340 350 360

Fig. 4: Mobile undercarriage signage, front view

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 21


ISO signage for Mobile 818 - 860 undercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on Mobile 818-860 undercarriage

Mobile 818-860 II undercarriage

520

510
365
500

365
460 440 450 470 480 490

Fig. 5: Mobile undercarriage signage, rear view

2.2 ISO warning and safety signs on Mobile 818-860 undercarriage

300 310 440 450

22 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for Mobile 818 - 860 undercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on Mobile 818-860 undercarriage

Lashing point label


General On lashing points
application area
Option ---

SE 186793

SE 186793

320

Instructions for lubricating mobile undercarriages.


General Undercarriage, front
application area
Option Mobile undercarriage with lubricating bar
SE 185251

SE 185251

330 340 460 470

WARNING. Extendable outrigger can cause serious crushing injury. Maintain a safe distance.
General On outrigger
application area
Option Mobile undercarriage with outrigger

SE 187235

SE 187235

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 23


ISO signage for Mobile 818 - 860 undercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on Mobile 818-860 undercarriage

350 360 410 420 480 490 510 520

Warning sign hatching


General On shearing points
application area

186
734
Option 1 Cab adjustment
SE

Option 2 Mobile undercarriage with claw support

SE 186734

365

Transmission oil
General Transmission lubricating point
application area
Option 1 Uppercarriage: diesel engine
SE 000000 Option 2 Undercarriage: mobile and crawler

SE See List of Operating Fluids and Lubricants

370 430

24 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for Mobile 818 - 860 undercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on Mobile 818-860 undercarriage

Direction arrow, undercarriage


General Undercarriage
application area
Option Mobile undercarriage

SE 139054

380 500

WARNING. Rotating cardan shaft can cause serious injuries. Maintain a safe distance.
General Undercarriage cardan shaft on both sides
application area
Option Mobile undercarriage with cardan shaft
SE 186934

SE 186934

390

Fire extinguisher label


General Fire extinguisher storage locations
application area
Option Fire extinguisher

www.sennebogen.de SE 123456

SE 184069

SE 184069

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 25


ISO signage for Mobile 818 - 860 undercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on Mobile 818-860 undercarriage

Stickers for optional hitch

Read the manual


General Interior cab, interior uppercarriage, undercarriage hitch, other
application area
Option 1 ---
Option 2 Hitch

SE 184072

WARNING. Engaging bolt can cause crushing. Do not touch.


General Undercarriage hitch
application area
Option Hitch
SE 187230

SE 187230

26 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
Overview diagrams of 818-860 uppercarriage

3 ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage


3.1 Overview diagrams of 818-860 uppercarriage
Exterior uppercarriage I

720 710 700 695

690

680
600
670

615 610 620 630 640 650 660

605

Fig. 6: Left and top exterior uppercarriage signage

Exterior uppercarriage II

840 835 830 810 820 730

740 750 800 760 790 770 780

735

Fig. 7: Right and top exterior uppercarriage signage

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 27


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
Overview diagrams of 818-860 uppercarriage

Interior uppercarriage I

900 910

Fig. 8: Left interior uppercarriage signage

Interior uppercarriage II

970 980 990

950 960

Fig. 9: Right and top interior uppercarriage signage

28 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

3.2 ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

600

WARNING. Rotating machine can cause death or serious injury. Stay clear of the danger zone.
General Exterior cab, exterior uppercarriage
application area
Option ---
SE 184075

SE 184075

605

WARNING. Falling stick tips can cause death or serious injury. Stay clear of the danger zone.
General On stick tip
application area
Option ---

SE 193836

SE 193836

610

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 29


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

Warning sign hatching


General On shearing points
application area

186
734
Option 1 Cab adjustment
SE

Option 2 Mobile undercarriage with claw support

SE 186734

615

WARNING. Lowering cab can result in crushing. Stay clear of the danger zone.
General Behind the cab
application area
Option Cab adjustment

SE 187227

SE 187227

620

WARNING. Lowering cab can result in crushing. Stay clear of the danger zone.
General On shearing points between cab and uppercarriage
application area
Option Cab adjustment
SE 186586

SE 186586

30 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

630

WARNING. Risk of injury during maintenance. Turn off engine and remove ignition key before per-
forming maintenance work. Wear hard hat, eye protection, protective gloves and protective
clothing. Read the manual.
General On maintenance flaps
application area
Option ---

SE 187231

SE 187231

640

Emergency drop label


General On emergency drop levers
application area
Option Cab adjustment

SE 184068

SE 184068

650

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 31


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

WARNING. Risk of injury during maintenance. Turn off engine and remove ignition key before per-
forming maintenance work. Wear hard hat, eye protection, protective gloves and protective
clothing. Read the manual.
General On maintenance flaps
application area
Option ---

SE 187231

SE 187231

660

Warning against collapse/falling when maximum platform load per section as per DIN EN ISO 2867
and ISO 11660-2 is exceeded. Do not exceed maximum platform load.
General Exterior cab, exterior uppercarriage
application area
max. 1
Option 1 Cab platform
max. 200 kg
max. 440 lb

SE 186994
Option 2 Uppercarriage platform

SE 186994

WARNING. Rotating machine can cause death or serious injury. Stay clear of the danger zone.
General Exterior cab, exterior uppercarriage
application area
Option ---
SE 184075

SE 184075

670

32 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

Warning against falling. Keep off.


General Top uppercarriage
application area
Option ---
SE 186941

SE 186941

680

Flammable diesel fuel - smoking prohibited


General Diesel filler neck
application area
Option Diesel engine
SE 186936

SE 186936

690

Sulfur-free diesel fuel or diesel fuel with less than 15 mg/kg sulfur content only.
General Top uppercarriage: diesel filler neck
application area
ULTRA LOW SULFUR FUEL ONLY

Option 1 Diesel engine


S ≤ 15 mg/kg
SE 186976 Option 2 Tier IIIb/Tier 4i/Tier 4f

SE 186976

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 33


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

Flammable diesel fuel - smoking prohibited


General Diesel filler neck
application area
Option Diesel engine
SE 186936

SE 186936

695

Warning against falling. Use fall arrest safety harness.


General Top uppercarriage
application area
Option Eye bolts
SE 186942

SE 186942

700

Lifting point label


General On lifting points
application area
Option ---

SE 186792

SE 186792

34 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

705

WARNING. Risk of injury during maintenance on pressurized hydraulic system. Read the manual.
General Inside hinged hydraulic system cover
application area
Option 850E, 860E, 870E, 875 E
SE 186275

SE 186275

710

Read the manual


General Interior cab, interior uppercarriage, undercarriage hitch, other
application area
Option 1 ---
Option 2 Hitch

SE 184072

Transmission oil
General Transmission lubricating point
application area
Option 1 Uppercarriage: diesel engine
SE 000000 Option 2 Undercarriage: mobile and crawler

SE See List of Operating Fluids and Lubricants

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 35


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

720

Lifting point label


General On lifting points
application area
Option ---

SE 186792

SE 186792

730

WARNING. Rotating machine can cause death or serious injury. Stay clear of the danger zone.
General Exterior cab, exterior uppercarriage
application area
Option ---
SE 184075

SE 184075

735

36 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

WARNING. Falling stick tips can cause death or serious injury. Stay clear of the danger zone.
General On stick tip
application area
Option ---

SE 193836

SE 193836

740

Warning against collapse/falling when maximum platform load per section as per DIN EN ISO 2867
and ISO 11660-2 is exceeded. Do not exceed maximum platform load.
General Exterior cab, exterior uppercarriage
application area
max. 1
Option 1 Cab platform
max. 200 kg
max. 440 lb

SE 186994
Option 2 Uppercarriage platform

SE 186994

WARNING. Rotating machine can cause death or serious injury. Stay clear of the danger zone.
General Exterior cab, exterior uppercarriage
application area
Option ---
SE 184075

SE 184075

750

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 37


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

WARNING. Risk of injury during maintenance. Turn off engine and remove ignition key before per-
forming maintenance work. Wear hard hat, eye protection, protective gloves and protective
clothing. Read the manual.
General On maintenance flaps
application area
Option ---

SE 187231

SE 187231

760

WARNING. Risk of injury during maintenance. Turn off engine and remove ignition key before per-
forming maintenance work. Wear hard hat, eye protection, protective gloves and protective
clothing. Read the manual.
General On maintenance flaps
application area
Option ---

SE 187231

SE 187231

770

WARNING. Rotating machine can cause death or serious injury. Stay clear of the danger zone.
General Exterior uppercarriage, on the gallery access ladder
application area
Option 1 ---
Option 2 Uppercarriage with gallery
SE 187228

SE 187228

38 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

780

No unauthorized access
General Uppercarriage access ladder
application area
Option ---

SE 187875

Warning against falling. Use fall arrest safety harness and wear safety shoes.
General Top uppercarriage
application area
Option ---
SE 187232

SE 187232

WARNING. Risk of injury during maintenance. Turn off engine and remove ignition key before per-
forming maintenance work. Wear hard hat, eye protection, protective gloves and protective
clothing. Read the manual.
General On maintenance flaps
application area
Option ---

SE 187231

SE 187231

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 39


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

Read the manual


General Interior cab, interior uppercarriage, undercarriage hitch, other
application area
Option 1 ---
Option 2 Hitch

SE 184072

790

Warning against falling. Keep off.


General Top uppercarriage
application area
Option ---
SE 186941

SE 186941

WARNING. Hot surface can cause burns. Maintain a safe distance


General Interior uppercarriage, top uppercarriage
application area
Option ---

SE 186637

SE 186637

800

40 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

Warning against falling. Keep off.


General Top uppercarriage
application area
Option ---
SE 186941

SE 186941

Read the manual


General Interior cab, interior uppercarriage, undercarriage hitch, other
application area
Option 1 ---
Option 2 Hitch

SE 184072

810

Lifting point label


General On lifting points
application area
Option ---

SE 186792

SE 186792

820

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 41


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

Lifting point label


General On lifting points
application area
Option ---

SE 186792

SE 186792

830

Keep off
General Top uppercarriage
application area
Option ---

SE 186980

WARNING. Pressurized and/or corrosive fluids can cause serious injury. Wear protective gloves
and eye protection.
General Interior uppercarriage: drive motor
application area
Interior uppercarriage: central hydraulic system
Top uppercarriage: drive motor
Top uppercarriage: hydraulic connections
SE 186974

Option ---
SE 186974

42 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

Read the manual


General Interior cab, interior uppercarriage, undercarriage hitch, other
application area
Option 1 ---
Option 2 Hitch

SE 184072

835

Warning against falling. Use fall arrest safety harness.


General Top uppercarriage
application area
Option Eye bolts
SE 186942

SE 186942

840

WARNING. Rotating fan blades can cause serious injury. Maintain a safe distance.
General Interior uppercarriage and top uppercarriage: fan
application area
Option ---

SE 186992

SE 186992

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 43


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

Instructions regarding filling the cooling system.


General On the expansion tank
application area
Option Diesel engine
SE 171878

SE 186988

WARNING. Overflow or boil-over can cause serious injury or scalding. Maintain a safe distance.
General Interior uppercarriage, top uppercarriage
application area
Option ---
SE 194751

SE 194751

WARNING. Pressurized and/or corrosive fluids can cause serious injury. Wear protective gloves
and eye protection.
General Interior uppercarriage: drive motor
application area
Interior uppercarriage: central hydraulic system
Top uppercarriage: drive motor
Top uppercarriage: hydraulic connections
SE 186974

Option ---
SE 186974

WARNING. Hot surface can cause burns. Maintain a safe distance


General Interior uppercarriage, top uppercarriage
application area
Option ---

SE 186637

SE 186637

44 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

Read the manual


General Interior cab, interior uppercarriage, undercarriage hitch, other
application area
Option 1 ---
Option 2 Hitch

SE 184072

900

HydroClean label
General Interior uppercarriage: HydroClean
application area
Option 1 HydroClean

SE 103004

SE 103004

Instructions for securing the service door against unintentional slamming.


General Inside of service door
application area
Option ---
2. 3.

1. 4.
SE 186986

SE 186986

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 45


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

WARNING. Pressurized and/or corrosive fluids can cause serious injury. Wear protective gloves
and eye protection.
General Interior uppercarriage: drive motor
application area
Interior uppercarriage: central hydraulic system
Top uppercarriage: drive motor
Top uppercarriage: hydraulic connections
SE 186974

Option ---
SE 186974

Hydraulic oil sampling point label


General Hydraulic oil sampling point
application area
Option ---

SE 186594

SE 186594

WARNING. Lowering cab can result in crushing. Stay clear of the danger zone.
General On shearing points between cab and uppercarriage
application area
Option Cab adjustment
SE 186586

SE 186586

Read the manual


General Interior cab, interior uppercarriage, undercarriage hitch, other
application area
Option 1 ---
Option 2 Hitch

SE 184072

46 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

Warning sign hatching


General On shearing points
application area

186
734
Option 1 Cab adjustment
SE

Option 2 Mobile undercarriage with claw support

SE 186734

Do not clean with high-pressure cleaner.


General Interior uppercarriage: central hydraulic system
application area
Interior uppercarriage: switch cabinet
Top uppercarriage: optional generator
Option 1 ---
Option 2 Generator
SE 186735

DEF fuel
Diesel exhaust fluid for US EPA Tier 4 final/EU Level IV diesel engines
General DEF tank
application area
Option DEF®
SE 000000

SE See List of Operating Fluids and Lubricants

Slewing ring grease


General Grease cylinder
application area
Option ---
SE 000000

SE See List of Operating Fluids and Lubricants

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 47


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

Refrigerant and low-temperature oil


General Refrigerant / low-temperature oil tank
application area
Option ---
SE 000000

SE See List of Operating Fluids and Lubricants

910

WARNING. Risk of explosion from overheated battery. No smoking or open flame.


General Interior uppercarriage: battery
application area
Option Diesel engine

SE 187891

SE 187891

40 A ignition fuse label


General Interior uppercarriage: battery
application area
Option Diesel engine
SE 186982

SE 186982

Battery disconnect switch label


General Interior uppercarriage: battery
application area
Option Diesel engine

SE 187011

SE 187011

48 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

WARNING. Corrosive battery acid and lead can cause serious injury. Maintain a safe distance.
General Interior uppercarriage: battery
application area
Option Diesel engine

SE 187012

SE 187012

WARNING. Electrical voltages can result in death or serious injury. Do not touch.
General Interior uppercarriage: switch cabinet
application area
Top uppercarriage: optional generator
Option 1 ---
SE 186737

Option 2 Generator

SE 186737

Read the manual


General Interior cab, interior uppercarriage, undercarriage hitch, other
application area
Option 1 ---
Option 2 Hitch

SE 184072

Leave battery disconnect switch on for at least 2 minutes after turning off diesel engine. Read man-
uals for more information.
General Interior uppercarriage: battery disconnect switch
application area
STOP

2 min

Option Diesel engine

SE 185402

SE 185402

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 49


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

24 V socket label
General On every 24 V socket
application area

24 V Option 24 V socket
SE 186587

SE 186587

Do not clean with high-pressure cleaner.


General Interior uppercarriage: central hydraulic system
application area
Interior uppercarriage: switch cabinet
Top uppercarriage: optional generator
Option 1 ---
Option 2 Generator
SE 186735

Grease
General Manual grease points
application area
Option ---
SE 000000

SE See List of Operating Fluids and Lubricants

950

50 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

WARNING. Rotating fan blades can cause serious injury. Maintain a safe distance.
General Interior uppercarriage and top uppercarriage: fan
application area
Option ---

SE 186992

SE 186992

Max. oil capacity label


General Hydraulic oil level indicator
application area
max. Option ---
SE 186975

SE 186975

WARNING. Rotating belt drive can cause serious injury. Maintain a safe distance.
General Interior uppercarriage: diesel engine
application area
Top uppercarriage: diesel engine
Option Diesel engine

SE 186738

SE 186738

WARNING. Pressurized and/or corrosive fluids can cause serious injury. Wear protective gloves
and eye protection.
General Interior uppercarriage: drive motor
application area
Interior uppercarriage: central hydraulic system
Top uppercarriage: drive motor
Top uppercarriage: hydraulic connections
SE 186974

Option ---
SE 186974

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 51


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

WARNING. Hot surface can cause burns. Maintain a safe distance


General Interior uppercarriage, top uppercarriage
application area
Option ---

SE 186637

SE 186637

WARNING. Overflow or boil-over can cause serious injury or scalding. Maintain a safe distance.
General Interior uppercarriage, top uppercarriage
application area
Option ---
SE 194751

SE 194751

Read the manual


General Interior cab, interior uppercarriage, undercarriage hitch, other
application area
Option 1 ---
Option 2 Hitch

SE 184072

24 V socket label
General On every 24 V socket
application area

24 V Option 24 V socket
SE 186587

SE 186587

52 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

Engine oil
General Engine oil reservoir or dipstick
application area
Option Diesel engine
SE 000000

SE See List of Operating Fluids and Lubricants

960

Read the manual


General Interior cab, interior uppercarriage, undercarriage hitch, other
application area
Option 1 ---
Option 2 Hitch

SE 184072

WARNING. Hot surface can cause burns. Maintain a safe distance


General Interior uppercarriage, top uppercarriage
application area
Option ---

SE 186637

SE 186637

970

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 53


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

Coolant
General Coolant reservoir
application area
Option ---
SE 000000

SE See List of Operating Fluids and Lubricants

980

Hydraulic oil
General Hydraulic oil tank
application area
Option ---
SE 000000

SE See List of Operating Fluids and Lubricants

990

Only use engine oils as per specification ACEA E9-08 or API CJ-4.
General Interior uppercarriage: diesel engine
application area
Engine Oil API CJ-4 only

Caterpillar ECF-3
Option 1 Diesel engine
Cummins CES 20081
Deutz DQC IV-10 LA
SE 186977

Option 2 Tier IIIb/Tier IVi/Tier IVf

SE 186977

54 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

WARNING. Rotating belt drive can cause serious injury. Maintain a safe distance.
General Interior uppercarriage: diesel engine
application area
Top uppercarriage: diesel engine
Option Diesel engine

SE 186738

SE 186738

Engine oil
General Engine oil reservoir or dipstick
application area
Option Diesel engine
SE 000000

SE See List of Operating Fluids and Lubricants

Other stickers

Warning sign hatching


General Outer edges of platform (machine boundaries), on shearing
application area points

186
734
Option Platform
SE

SE 187969

WARNING. Falling parts can result in death or serious injury. Stay clear of the danger zone. Wear a
hard hat.
General 2x on pylon
application area
Option Pylon
SE 187229

SE 187229

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 55


ISO signage for 818 - 860 uppercarriage
ISO warning and safety signs on 818-860 uppercarriage

WARNING. Rotating machine can cause death or serious injury. Stay clear of the danger zone.
General Outer edges of platform (machine boundaries)
application area
Option Platform
SE 184075

SE 193120

56 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


Index

4 Index
C SE 186737 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 SE 186738 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 55


SE 186761 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
D SE 186762 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
DEF fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 SE 186792 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 34, 36, 41, 42
SE 186793 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
E
SE 186818 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 55
SE 186851 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
G SE 186852 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 SE 186853 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 186854 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
H
SE 186855 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
SE 186856 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
R SE 186857 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Refrigerant and low-temperature oil . . . . . . . . . 48 SE 186858 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 186859 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
S SE 186860 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 103004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 SE 186861 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 139054 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 SE 186862 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 184068 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 31 SE 186863 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 184069 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 25 SE 186864 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 184072 16, 26, 35, 40, 41, 43, 45, 46, 49, SE 186865 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
52, 53
SE 186866 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 184075 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 13, 29, 32, 36, 37
SE 186867 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 185251 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
SE 186868 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 185402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
SE 186869 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 186275 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
SE 186870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 186583 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 17
SE 186871 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 186585 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
SE 186872 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 186586 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 46
SE 186873 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 186587 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 50, 52
SE 186874 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 186588 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
SE 186875 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 186594 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
SE 186876 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 186596 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 186877 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 186637 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 44, 52, 53
SE 186878 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 186638 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SE 186879 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SE 186639 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
SE 186880 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SE 186734 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 24, 30, 47
SE 186881 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SE 186735 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 50

25.04.2018 818-860 Mobile 57


Index

SE 186882 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SE 187229 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
SE 186883 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SE 187230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
SE 186884 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SE 187231 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 32, 38, 39
SE 186885 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SE 187232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
SE 186886 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SE 187235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
SE 186887 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SE 187237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SE 186888 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SE 187875 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
SE 186889 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SE 187891 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
SE 186890 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SE 187969 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 55
SE 186891 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SE 193120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 56
SE 186892 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SE 193129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
SE 186893 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SE 193130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SE 186894 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SE 193836 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 37
SE 186895 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SE 194751 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 52
SE 186896 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Slewing ring grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
SE 186897 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
T
SE 186898 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Transmission oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 35
SE 186899 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SE 186900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SE 186934 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
SE 186936 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 34
SE 186941 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 40, 41
SE 186942 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 43
SE 186974 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 44, 46, 51
SE 186975 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
SE 186976 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
SE 186977 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
SE 186980 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
SE 186982 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
SE 186983 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SE 186986 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
SE 186988 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
SE 186992 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 51
SE 186994 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 32, 37
SE 187011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
SE 187012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
SE 187224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
SE 187225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
SE 187227 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
SE 187228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

58 818-860 Mobile 25.04.2018


Warranty Manual for Machines built by
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH (VALID FROM 01.04.2020)

INFORMATION FOR CUSTOMERS

Content Page

1. Care and Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 2


2. Original Spare Parts .................................................................................................................. 2
3. Service Agreements .................................................................................................................. 3
4. Oil Analysis ................................................................................................................................. 3
5. Pre-requisites ........................................................................................................................... 3
5.1 Submission of the Commissioning Certificate .......................................................................... 3
5.2 Commissioning certificate for extended warranty .................................................................... 3
5.3 Dealer Receiving Inspection Form when delivery to the customer is at a later date ............. 3
5.4 Maintenance and service by an authorised partner ................................................................. 3
5.5 Observance of maintenance intervals ...................................................................................... 4
5.6 Use of genuine spare parts ....................................................................................................... 4
5.7 Hour meter in working condition ............................................................................................... 4
5.8 Use of machine as intended ...................................................................................................... 4
5.9 Use of approved lubricants ....................................................................................................... 4
6. Warranty Exclusions .................................................................................................................. 4
6.1 Customised solutions ................................................................................................................ 4
6.2 Damage during transportation .................................................................................................. 4
6.3 Incorrect commissioning and start-up ....................................................................................... 4
6.4 Third party negligence ................................................................................................................ 4
6.5 Normal wear and tear ................................................................................................................ 4
6.6 Warranty expiration .................................................................................................................... 4
6.7 Defects not originated from delivered item ............................................................................... 5
6.8 Disassembling of components .................................................................................................. 5
6.9 Loss of warranty parts ............................................................................................................... 5
7. Preservation of Stock Machines ............................................................................................... 5
8. Warranty Claim Processing ....................................................................................................... 6
9. Customer’s contribution to fault correction ................................................................................ 6

Page 1 of 6
Warranty Manual Version 2020-1
1. Care and Maintenance

It is the proverbial equipment dependability, reliability and long life of SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH
products that make customers prefer these machines. Nonetheless regular care and maintenance are necessary
for these fine qualities to be maintained, so that the sophisticated SENNEBOGEN machines match the high
standards of performance the industry demands from them.

The operation and maintenance manuals contain maintenance instructions dependant on operating conditions
and service periods. These maintenance procedures form part of the proper operation of the machine. Failure to
follow them can give rise to problems with the machine operation and to a loss in reliability and service life of the
machine.

Careful treatment, in addition to the specified maintenance procedures, will spare the owner or user problems and
failures. The deciding factors are the training and conduct of the person entrusted with operating the machine.
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH recommends training these employees with the correct qualification to
fulfil their responsibility: SENNEBOGEN therefore offers special training programmes at a shared cost. Warranty
is ruled out for any loss or damage due to neglect or inadequate care.

Maintenance parts, wearing parts and consumables do not fall within the terms of the machine’s warranty,
where the damage is caused by normal wear and tear or due to lack of maintenance.
Maintenance work specified in the service book, which has not been performed at all, has not been carried out in
due time, has been inadequately completed or has not been performed by an authorised SENNEBOGEN
Maschinenfabrik GmbH service partner can result in the warranty being forfeited. Warranty is ruled out for any loss
or damage due to lack of maintenance.

The execution of the specified maintenance serves as a basis for warranty claims. The
specified maintenance intervals must be observed and proof of all inspections must be
furnished by sending the completed service documentation form to the SENNEBOGEN
service department. Failure to meet this requirement causes warranty requests to
become void.
2. Original Spare Parts

Only genuine SENNEBOGEN parts are of proper mechanical construction and design for SENNEBOGEN
Maschinenfabrik GmbH machines and have been released after thorough testing and intensive experiments. Only
genuine SENNEBOGEN parts conform exactly to the specifications of SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH for
construction, dimensional stability and material.

The use of outside parts is a risk, which can easily be avoided. SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH
strongly recommends the exclusive use of original SENNEBOGEN parts. Where outside parts are used,
SENNEBOGEN does not accept any warranty whatsoever with regard to proper operation, safety and reliability of
the machines and will not be held liable for any loss or damage resulting there from. Original SENNEBOGEN parts
are available from SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH authorised service partners or from the SENNEBOGEN
Spare Parts Centre in Straubing (spareparts@sennebogen.de )

Only Original SENNEBOGEN parts must be used.

Page 2 of 6
Warranty Manual Version 2020-1
3. Service Agreements

Service agreements with the authorised service partners are the safest way for owners or users to meet the
requirements and have all maintenance operations performed professionally. The SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik
GmbH service partners know the SENNEBOGEN machines well. Their personnel are adequately trained and have
the required original SENNEBOGEN parts, the necessary documentation and the correct tools.

SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH recommends the conclusion of a service agreement


with an authorised Service Partner.

Warranty programs as well as extended warranty periods are only valid in conjunction with a
service and maintenance agreement with an authorised SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik
GmbH Service Partner.

4. Oil Analysis

Scheduled oil sampling and analysis provides the customer and owner or user with regular information about the
condition of the machine. This preventative measure helps to detect potential failures or defective components.
Maintenance intervals are listed in the operating and maintenance manual.

SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH strongly recommends oil sampling


and analysis at regular intervals.

5. Pre-requisites

When claiming from warranty, the following points must be complied with:

5.1 Submission of the Commissioning Certificate


The warranty period starts from the date of commissioning on condition that the commissioning certificate is
returned to SENNEBOGEN within 10 working days after commissioning the machine. Otherwise the warranty
period begins in accordance with the lawful regulations with the ex works delivery date of the machine.

5.2. Commissioning certificate for extended warranty


The return of the commissioning certificate is imperative requirement for the extended warranty program to take
effect.

5.3 Dealer Receiving Inspection Form when delivery to the customer is at a later date
The Dealer Receiving Inspection Form is imperative when the machine is not delivered to the customer
immediately after delivery from SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH. The result of the dealer’s receiving
inspection must be submitted using the “Dealer Receiving Inspection form” to the SENNEBOGEN After Sales
Service Department within 10 working days after receiving the machine. Should the Dealer Receiving Inspection
Form not be submitted within the specified time limit, the warranty begins with the date of delivery ex works.

Page 3 of 6
Warranty Manual Version 2020-1
5.4. Maintenance and servicing by duly authorized partners
Only the SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH service partners are authorised to perform the maintenance
and service as specified by the warranty. Service performed by a third party will cause any warranty to become
void.

5.5. Observance of maintenance intervals specified


The maintenance intervals as specified in the operating and maintenance manuals must be observed, and the
customer must furnish proof thereof (see Service Documentation Appendix VIII).

5.6. Use of genuine spare parts


Only genuine SENNEBOGEN spare parts may be used. Upon request, the customer has to produce the relevant
evidence.

5.7. Hour meter in working condition


Proper operation of the service hour meter must be ensured at all times. Any defective service hour meters must
be reported to the SENNEBOGEN service partner for immediate replacement. The respective service hour meter
reading and the date warranty work was carried out must be noted in the warranty claim and proof thereof
furnished upon request. Failure to meet this requirement will cause any warranty to become void!

5.8. Use of the machine as intended.


Improper use of the machine will cause all warranty to be invalid.

5.9. Use of approved lubricants.


A warranty claim can be rejected when damage is caused by the use of explicitly not approved lubricants. It is
not possible to test all lubricants. The lubricants approved by SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH are
summarised in the appropriate valid issue of the lubricant table.

6. Warranty Exclusions

6.1. Customised solutions


Any special solutions provided by SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH for individual customers are excluded
from the extended warranty options. The parts warranty remains valid.

6.2. Damage during transportation


Any claim for damage in transit must be put forward to the forwarder immediately upon receipt, or must be reported
to the insurance company covering the transportation. Damage in transit does not fall within the scope of the
warranty.

6.3. Incorrect commissioning and start-up


The service partners are the best contact to provide technically correct and faultless commissioning and start-up of
the machien. Proper commissioning is the responsibility of the agency that has been entrusted with commissioning.
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH is not responsible for any faulty installation or faulty commissioning
performed by the ordering party (buyer) or by any third party.

6.4. Third party negligence


Defects which SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH is not responsible for, are faults caused by:
� Improper operation
� Installation of spare parts of foreign origin (not genuine SENNEBOGEN parts)
� Improper or careless treatment and maintenance
� Outside influences such as chemical, electrochemical or electrical influences which can not be attributed to a
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH fault.

6.5. Normal wear and tear


Wear and tear are natural processes and not “defects”.

Page 4 of 6
Warranty Manual Version 2020-1
6.6. Warranty Expiration
Warranty is limited to a set time period from date of delivery or commissioning, in months or hours of operation
whichever is attained first. Once this has been attained, the warranty has expired and is no longer applicable.

6.7. Defects which have not originated from the delivered item
SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH warranty only covers the products delivered by SENNEBOGEN
Maschinenfabrik GmbH and any defects that may occur on said products. The restrictions stated in the
SENNEBOGEN terms of delivery and payment apply. Further damage is expressly excluded.

6.8. Disassembling of components


Open or disassembled parts and components are excluded from the warranty. Once the parts have been
disassembled a damage analysis is no longer possible. The suppliers of the important and expensive parts
generally reject these warranty claims.

6.9. Loss of Warranty Parts


Warranty parts that disappear during the return delivery are considered the responsibility of the sender. A warranty
claim can only be determined when the parts, or in exceptional cases after consulting with SENNEBOGEN
Maschinenfabrik GmbH on presentation of informative photos

Generally excluded are any and all subsequent expenses incurred for machine transports,
machine downtimes as well as for any temporary equipment.
The restrictions stated in SENNEBOGEN’S terms of delivery and payments apply.

7. Preservation of Stock Machines

If machines are not put into operation immediately after delivery, it is necessary that dependent on the storage
period the respective preventive measures are taken.
1. When the machine is not in use for a longer period of time, various cylinders when possible must be
retracted. The chrome layer on cylinders that are extended must be protected against corrosion
(greased).
2. The diesel tank must be filled to capacity to prevent corrosion.
3. The batteries must be disconnected and the voltage checked regularly (min. once a month). Should the
voltage drop to below 12.4 V, the batteries must be charged.
4. The engine and the hydraulic system must be run until the normal operating temperature is reached
(approx. 1 hour). Move the machine so that the wheels turn (once a month).
5. All operating fluid levels must be checked regularly
6. Cylinders must be retracted and extended.
7. If the machine is being stored for a longer period further preservation measures for the engine must be
carried out together with the engine manufacturer’s local representative.
8. Ropes / cables must be covered or greased well.
9. Protect the exhaust, so that water or foreign particles can not enter the system
10. Place tyre machines on the outriggers, tyres must not have contact with the ground.
11. Protect the cab windshield against erosive influences, for example sand.
12. Cover and protect the air filter, so that foreign particles cannot enter.
13. Protect and preserve the diesel tank inlet on the inside against rust
14. Check the anti-freeze (-40 ° C)
15. In winter pay particular attention to the storage temperature, if necessary fill with winter / arctic diesel.
16. Close all machine inlets

Page 5 of 6
Warranty Manual Version 2020-1
The above mentioned preservation measures serve only as a recommended basis or check list without intending to
be complete. Damages caused due to incorrect storage or preservation measures not carried out, are exclude from
all warranty.
When commissioning the machine, ensure that all protective measures are removed and that a maintenance
service based on the machine and engine manufacturer’s specifications is carried out. Oil and other fluid filling
levels must be checked.

8. Warranty Processing

Correction of the fault is the responsibility . . . .


. . . of the SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH service network.

SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH authorised service partners, the SENNEBOGEN After Sales Service
Department and SENNEBOGEN’s subsidiaries – are the first port of call world-wide for maintenance, care, repairs,
and supply of genuine SENNEBOGEN parts, both during and after the warranty period.
In the case of a breakdown, customers can contact their nearest SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH service
partner and commission him to correct the problem. When damage to parts occurs within the warranty period, the
fault correction is carried out in accordance with the warranty option selected. The service partner will process any
warranty claim directly with SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH. All services rendered beyond the claim will
be charged to the customer.
The service partner addresses can be found in the SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH service information, as
well as on our internet site www.sennebogen.de .

9. Customer’s contribution to fault correction

Correction of faults is not possible without the owner or user of the machine’s assistance. The owner or user is
obliged to afford the SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH’s service partner the time and opportunity to correct
any faults. The customer failing to allow the service partner the time and opportunity to correct the fault during an
adequate timeframe after noticing the defect (max. 3-4 weeks), immediately for safety relevant defects, constitutes
in a waiver of the warranty.
When the operational safety is endangered, or excessively large damage needs to be repaired, the customer may
upon receipt of written authorisation from SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH repair the damage himself or
have a third party complete the repair. The repair costs are then covered by SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik
GmbH. Any modifications or repairs performed without prior permission from the manufacturer will cause the
warranty to become void.

Page 6 of 6
Warranty Manual Version 2020-1
Operation manual

Addition to the operating manual


SENNEBOGEN Diagnostic System Plus (SDS+)

Read this manual prior to performing any task!


SENNEBOGEN Maschinenfabrik GmbH
Hebbelstraße 30
94315 Straubing
Telephone: +49 9421 540-0
E-mail: documentation@sennebogen.de
Internet: http://www.sennebogen.de
Translation of the original operation manual
SDS+ Ergänzung der Betriebsanleitung, 2, en_US

© 2018

2 Addition to the operating manual SENNEBOGEN Diagnostic System Plus (SDS+) 12.11.2018
Table of contents

Table of contents
1 SDS+ Addition to the operating manual........................... 4
1.1 New user interface........................................................ 5
1.2 Function enhancements............................................... 6
1.2.1 Adjust display brightness........................................... 6
1.2.2 Set the daytime hours counter................................... 7
1.3 New fault code list......................................................... 8

12.11.2018 Addition to the operating manual SENNEBOGEN Diagnostic System Plus (SDS+) 3
SDS+ Addition to the operating manual

1 SDS+ Addition to the operating manual


Observe the original operating manual
The operating manual delivered with the machi-
nery remains valid and must be observed.

The SENNEBOGEN Diagnostic System (SDS) has been equipped


with new functions and features. The name for the revised system
is SDS+.
This addition to the operating manual describes the three new fea-
tures of SDS+:
n New user interface
n Adjust display brightness
n New operation of the daytime hours counter

4 Addition to the operating manual SENNEBOGEN Diagnostic System Plus (SDS+) 12.11.2018
SDS+ Addition to the operating manual
New user interface

1.1 New user interface


This section replaces the description of the user interface in the
previous operating manual

1 Display brightness button


2 Daytime hours counter button
3 HOME button
4 ENTER button
5 ESC button
6 SCROLL wheel
7 USB port

Item Description Description


number
1 Display brightness Switch on the backlight in day-lighting or night-lighting.
button
2 Daytime hours Activate, deactivate and reset the daytime hours counter.
counter button
3 HOME button Return to start screen.
4 ENTER button Confirm settings.
The ENTER button in Display carries out the same function.

12.11.2018 Addition to the operating manual SENNEBOGEN Diagnostic System Plus (SDS+) 5
SDS+ Addition to the operating manual
Function enhancements > Adjust display brightness

Item Description Description


number
5 ESC button Cancel action.
The ESC button in Display carries out the same function.
6 SCROLL wheel Turning the SCROLL wheel selects between individual windows and
menu items, and scrolls through lists.
Pressing the SCROLL wheel confirms a setting.
7 USB port Ports for importing and exporting machine data and error memories

1.2 Function enhancements


1.2.1 Adjust display brightness
This section supplements the previous operating manual.
1. Press the button (1) to select the display brightness.
2. Press down the SCROLL wheel for five seconds.
ð n A blue edge (a) will appear.
n The function is selected.
3. Set the brightness for the day-lighting.

Reduce brightness Turn the SCROLL wheel to


the left.
Increase brightness Turn the SCROLL wheel to
the right.

4. Press the SCROLL wheel once.


ð n The setting is accepted.
n The blue edge changes to set the night-lighting.
n The function is selected.
5. Set the brightness for the night-lighting.

Reduce brightness Turn the SCROLL wheel to


the left.
Increase brightness Turn the SCROLL wheel to
the right.

6. Press the SCROLL wheel once.


ð The setting is accepted.

6 Addition to the operating manual SENNEBOGEN Diagnostic System Plus (SDS+) 12.11.2018
SDS+ Addition to the operating manual
Function enhancements > Set the daytime hours counter

1.2.2 Set the daytime hours counter


This section replaces the description of the activation, deactivation
and resetting of the daytime hours counter in the previous oper-
ating manual.

Activating and deactivating the


daytime hours counter.
1. Press the button (2) to select the daytime hours counter.
2. Pressing the button (2) again changes the operating state of
the daytime hours counter.

Display (b), (c) Operating state


Daytime hours counter active

Daytime hours counter not


active

The daytime hours counter is activated once the


2 Daytime hours counter button motor speed surpasses 400 rpm.
b Daytime hours counter info
window The daytime hours counter is deactivated once the
c Daytime hours counter active/not motor speed falls below 400 rpm.
active symbol

Reset daytime hours counter 1. Press the button (2) to select the daytime hours counter.
2. Press down the SCROLL wheel for five seconds.
ð The daytime hours counter is reset.

12.11.2018 Addition to the operating manual SENNEBOGEN Diagnostic System Plus (SDS+) 7
SDS+ Addition to the operating manual
New fault code list

1.3 New fault code list


This fault code list replaces the fault code list in the original oper-
ating manual for the SDS:

code Icon Explanation


101 / 102 / 103 Coolant temperature

111 / 112 / 113 Engine oil pressure

121 / 122 / 123 Diesel fuel level

131 / 132 / 133 Hydraulic oil temperature

141 / 142 / 143 Battery voltage

151 Air filter

161 Hydraulic oil return filter

171 HydroClean micro-filtration system

181 Hydraulic oil auxiliary control filter

191 Coolant level

201 Hydraulic oil flap

211 Hydraulic oil level

221 Empty signal for central lubrication system

8 Addition to the operating manual SENNEBOGEN Diagnostic System Plus (SDS+) 12.11.2018
SDS+ Addition to the operating manual
New fault code list

code Icon Explanation


231 accumulator charge pressure

241 Slewing gear holding brake

301 / 311 CAN communication

12.11.2018 Addition to the operating manual SENNEBOGEN Diagnostic System Plus (SDS+) 9

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen